Home

D-Link DES-3018 User's Manual

Contents

1. Succession RADIUS Server Auth UDP Port Acct UDP Port First Figure 10 22 Authentic RADIUS Server and Current RADIUS Server Settings Table window This window displays the following information Parameter Description Click Apply to implement changes made 156 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Trusted Host To view the Trusted Host table click Security gt Trusted Host IPI Access to Switch 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask Oooo IP Access to Switch 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 TP3 Access to Switch 0 0 0 0 ay Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 TP4 Access to Switch 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 TIPS Access to Switch 0 0 0 0 Subnet wask 0 0 0 0 IPG Access to Switch 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 IP Access to Switch 0 0 0 0 Subnet wask 0 0 0 0 IPS Access to Switch 0 0 0 0 l Subnet Mask D 0 0 0 IP9 Access to Switch 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask D 0 0 0 IP10 Access to Switch 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0
2. Show All Multicast Forwarding Figure 6 58 Setup Static Multicast Forwarding Table Add The following parameters can be set Parameter Description The VLAN ID of the VLAN to which the corresponding MAC address belongs Multicast MAC The MAC address of the static source of multicast packets This must be a multicast MAC Address address Port Settings Allows the selection of ports that will be members of the static multicast group The options are None No restrictions on the port dynamically joining the multicast group When None is chosen the port will not be a member of the Static Multicast Group Egress The port is a static member of the multicast group Click Apply to implement the changes made To delete an entry in the Static Multicast Forwarding Table click the corresponding under the Delete heading Click the Show All Multicast Forwarding Entries link to return to the Static Multicast Forwarding Settings window 73 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Multicast Filtering Mode Use the Multicast Filtering Mode Setting menu to select one of two filtering options for multicast packets e Forward unregistered groups This default setting will forward all multicast streams e Filter unregistered groups This setting will only forward multicasts to registered multicast groups Multicasts to unregistered groups are blocked To view this window click Ad
3. Figure 7 14 Static Router Ports Settings window The Static Router Ports Settings page shown above displays all of the current entries to the Switch s static router port table To modify an entry click the Modify button This will open the Static Router Ports Settings Modify page as shown below Member Ports 2131415161718 19110111 26 OO 2 3 ajaja la aaa aaa aaa ply Ap show All Static Router Ports Entries Figure 7 15 Static Router Ports Settings Modify window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description VID This is the VLAN ID that along with the VLAN Name identifies the VLAN where the multicast router is attached VLAN Name This is the name of the VLAN where the multicast router is attached Member Ports These are the ports on the Switch that will have a multicast router attached to them Click Apply to implement the new settings Click the Show All Static Router Port Entries link to return to the Current Static Router Port Entries window 99 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual IGMP Access Control Settings This window is used to enable the IGMP access control settings on the switch When the access control settings are enabled the switch will receive an IGMP join message the switch will then send the access request to the radius server to complete the authentication process To view this window click L2 Features gt IGMP Snoo
4. Note Create a list of IP Addresses that can access the switch Your local host IF a must co one of the IF Addresses to avoid disconnection Figure 10 23 Security IP Management menu Use the Security IP Management to permit remote stations to manage the Switch If you choose to define one or more designated management stations only the chosen stations as defined by IP address and Subnet Mask will be allowed management privilege through the web manager or Telnet session To define a management station IP setting type in the IP address and click the Apply button Click Del All to remove all IP addresses configured from being Trusted Hosts 137 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Traffic Segmentation Traffic segmentation is used to limit traffic flow from a single port to a group of ports on either a single Switch in standalone mode or a group of ports on another switch in a switch stack This method of segmenting the flow of traffic is similar to using VLANs to limit traffic but is more restrictive It provides a method of directing traffic that does not increase the overhead of the Master switch CPU To view this window click Security gt Traffic Segmentation Pot 1 1 26 A 1 26 4 1 26 A l 26 5 1 26 l 26 7 1 26 E 1 26 Y 1 26 10 1 26 11 1 26 lz 1 26 13 1 246 14 1 26 15 1 26 16 1 26 14 1 26 ls 1 26 1 1 26 aU 1 246 41 1 26 fe 1 46 A 1 26 e 1 2
5. 10 100 Mbps Connection S Q Figure 7 7 Example of Port Trunk Group End Station Clients The Switch treats all ports in a trunk group as a single port Data transmitted to a specific host destination address will always be transmitted over the same port in a trunk group This allows packets in a data stream to arrive in the same order they were sent 91 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual NOTE If any ports within the trunk group become disconnected packets intended for the disconnected port will be load shared among the other uplinked ports of the link aggregation group Link aggregation allows several ports to be grouped together and to act as a single link This gives a bandwidth that is a multiple of a single link s bandwidth Link aggregation is most commonly used to link a bandwidth intensive network device or devices such as a server to the backbone of a network The Switch allows the creation of up to 3 link aggregation groups each group consisting of 2 to 4 links ports All of the ports in the group must be members of the same VLAN and their STP status static multicast traffic control traffic segmentation and 802 1p default priority configurations must be identical Port locking port mirroring and 802 1X must not be enabled on the trunk group Further the aggregated links must all be of the same speed and should be configured as full duplex The Mast
6. ge Switch Authenticator RADIUS Server Authentication Server Workstation Client Figure 10 8 The Client 142 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Authentication Process Utilizing the three roles stated above the 802 1X protocol provides a stable and secure way of authorizing and authenticating users attempting to access the network Only EAPOL traffic 1s allowed to pass through the specified port before a successful authentication is made This port is locked until the point when a Client with the correct username and password and MAC address if 802 1X is enabled by MAC address is granted access and therefore successfully unlocks the port Once the port is unlocked normal traffic is allowed to pass through the port The following figure displays a more detailed explanation of how the authentication process is completed between the three roles stated above 502 1A Authentication process RADIUS Server Authentication Server Switch Workstation Client Authenticator O S y RADIUS Access Request Aa A h0 gt RADIUS Access Challenge 6 _ RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Accept Port Authorized RADIUS Account Stop RADIUS Ack Port Unauthorized OTF One T ime Password Figure 10 9 The 802 1X Authentication Process The D Link implementation of 802 1X allows network administrators to choose
7. A D Link fornece suporte t cnico gratuito para clientes no Brasil durante o per odo de vig ncia da garantia deste produto Suporte T cnico para clientes no Brasil Telefone Sao Paulo 11 2185 9301 Segunda a sexta Das 8h30 as 18h30 Demais Regi es do Brasil 0800 70 24 104 E mail e mail suporte dlinkbrasil com br D Link Building Networks for People D Link KAFR ASTAN HM SCHL RIA LAB MSE A ST a RE E be H i ES 2 e se gt ET EFK ESEAS D Link ERES AEA D Link AT EIRA AR 0800 002 615 IRIRE AeA gt E E8 3021_E9 00 R HRR ERH FS y5 http www dlink com tw EJEA dssga_servicel dlink com tw MARE AE LIMA A gt 235 D Link es He TIA ALA DUAL dE gt mere A IS ae http www dlink com tw ZE neat EHETE REEE a A Bas TI R E ERER gt D Link Building Networks for People Dukungan Teknis Update perangkat lunak dan dokumentasi pengguna dapat diperoleh pada situs web D Link Dukungan Teknis untuk pelanggan Dukungan Teknis D Link melalui telepon Tel 62 21 5731610 Dukungan Teknis D Link melalui Internet Email support dlink co id Website http support dlink co id D Link Building Networks for People DOAN SL HF fs Hy LE D Link HS E TAEA ER PI E m RIE a PE F pH IMA TESTA EE IA FR ER 36S TARR DUB KK26F 02 0525 WB 100013 FEAR SC HEH UD HL 8008296688 028 66052968 FLAC HEP MEA 028 85176948 ARE PUL tik JER AR a AK A
8. Figure 11 25 Authenticator Diagnostics window The user may select the desired time interval to update the statistics between s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second The following fields can be viewed 189 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Parameter Description Pot The identification number assigned to the Port by the System in which the Port resides EntersConnecting Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions to the CONNECTING state from any other state EapLogOffsConnecting Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from CONNECTING to DISCONNECTED as a result of receiving an EAPOL Logoff message EntersAuthenticating Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from CONNECTING to AUTHENTICATING as a result of an EAP Response Identity message being received from the Supplicant SuccessAuthenticating Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to AUTHENTICATED as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating successful authentication of the Supplicant authSuccess TRUE TimeoutsAuthenticating Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication timeout authTimeout TRUE FailAuthenticating Counts th
9. T R otal Entries 2 Note Itis allowed msert 10 entries into the table only Community Name View Name Access Right Delete orar View Read Write Community View Read Only Figure 6 29 SNMP Community Table window The following parameters can set Parameter Description Community Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify members of an SNMP community This string is used like a password to give remote SNMP managers access to MIB objects in the Switch s SNMP agent View Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify the group of MIB objects that a remote SNMP manager is allowed to access on the Switch The view name must exist in the SNMP View Table Access Right Read Only Specifies that SNMP community members using the community string created can only read the contents of the MIBs on the Switch Read Write Specifies that SNMP community members using the community string created can read from and write to the contents of the MIBs on the Switch To implement the new settings click Apply To delete an entry from the SNMP Community Table click the corresponding button under the Delete heading 52 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual SNMP Host Table Use the SNMP Host Table to set up SNMP trap recipients To view the SNMP Host Table window
10. Technical Support You can find software updates and user documentation on the D Link website Tech Support for customers in Australia Tel 1300 766 868 Monday to Friday 8 00am to 8 00pm EST Saturday 9 00am to 1 00pm EST http www dlink com au e mail support dlink com au India Tel 1800 222 002 Monday to Friday 9 30AM to 7 00PM http www dlink co in support productsupport aspx Indonesia Malaysia Singapore and Thailand Tel 62 21 5731610 Indonesia Tel 1800 882 880 Malaysia Tel 65 66229355 Singapore Tel 66 2 719 8978 9 Thailand Monday to Friday 9 00am to 6 00pm http www dlink com sg support e mail support dlink com sg Korea Tel 82 2 890 5496 Monday to Friday 9 00am to 6 00pm http Www d link co kr e mail lee d link co kr New Zealand Tel 0800 900 900 Monday to Friday 8 30am to 8 30pm Saturday 9 00am to 5 00pm http www dlink co nz e mail support dlink co nz D Link Building Networks for People Technical Support You can find software updates and user documentation on the D Link website Tech Support for customers in Egypt Tel 202 2919035 or 202 2919047 Sunday to Thursday 9 00am to 5 00pm http support dlink me com e mail amostafa dlink me com Iran Tel 98 21 88822613 Sunday to Thursday 9 00am to 6 00pm http support dlink me com e mail support ir dlink me com Israel Tel 972 9 9715701 Sunday to Thursday 9 00am to 5 00pm http w
11. b El AE IS tm JE Bla 0 Els fo Firmware Version p La Hardware Version system Name system Location System Contact Disabled Detail settings Disabled Detail settings single IP Management Disabled Detail settings Spanning Tree WLAC Notification serial Port Auto Logout Never we serial Port Baud Rate 3600 v MAC Address Aging Time 10 1000000 IGMP Snooping Disabled Multicast Router Only Disabled Telnet TCP Port Number 1 65535 23 Web Status Enabled Web TCP Port Number 1 65535 80 EMON Status Disabled v Link Aggregation Algorithm MAC Source Switch 802 1x Disabled vi Auth Protocol Forward EAPOL PDU Both Disabled syslog Status Disabled Port Security Trap Log Disabled Y ARP Aging Time 0 65535 20 Figure 6 1 Device Information screen Ze DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual IP Address The IP Address may initially be set using the console interface prior to connecting to it through the Ethernet If the Switch IP address has not yet been changed read the introduction of the Command Line Interface Reference Manual or return to Section 4 of this manual for more information To change IP settings using the web manager you must access the IP Address menu located
12. Broadcast storm Port lt unitlD portNum gt Informational cleared Broadcast storm has cleared Multicast storm Port lt unitID portNum gt Warning occurrence Multicast storm is occurring Multicast storm Port lt unitID portNum gt Informational cleared Multicast storm has cleared Port shut down due Port lt unitID portNum gt Warning to a packet storm is currently shut down due to a packet storm CTP detect port Configuration Testing Warning loop Protocol detects a loop in port lt unitID portNum gt VID assigned from Radius server lt ipaddr gt Informational This log will be radius server after assigned vid lt vlanlD gt generated when 802 1X radius client to port authentication is authenticated by lt unitID portNum gt successful and the radius server account lt username gt target VLAN is assigned successfully This from the RADIUS VID will assign to server the port and this port will be the vian untagged port member Ingress bandwidth RADIUS server Informational This log will be assigned from lt ipaddr gt assigned generated when the radius server after ingress bandwith 802 1X authentication is radius client lt ingressBandwidth gt to successful and ingress authenticated by port lt unitlD portNum gt bandwidth is assigned radius server account lt username gt from the RADIUS successfully This server ingress bandwidth will be assigned to 207 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010
13. DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Managed 8 16 24 port 10 100Mbps N Way Fast Ethernet Switch Release 4 2 Manual Information in this document is subject to change without notice 2008 D Link Corporation All rights reserved Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of D Link Computer Corporation is strictly forbidden Trademarks used in this text D Link and the D LINK logo are trademarks of D Link Computer Corporation Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products D Link Computer Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own November 2008 P N 651ES3026055G Copyright 2008 All rights reserved Table of Contents Pro IO A A Id Meended EAS ic ON X Typo strap hicalC Onv CintiOMs 4 0 A A A A IL E AD A A A AA O X TNO INC AAA A T AEAEE e AE erat AEON X Sai Cy MSTO ONS dica ida cis xi Sal Sly C OS AA AAA A A E xi Protecting Against Electrostatio Disc har Seeiso a TT a E AA E TST xiii roduittain a a aaa a S WAC MIDS SCO ONT A E O l AS AA E T RR RR A 1 Ethernet Technolo Vires o N 3 AS A asd AE E EA oben delta adalat ican uN SEN leet heat dai S EN E E ES ESN S EEE EAEE 3 Gigabit Ethernet Technolo t essiri E E E E E lewis eliniathe 3 So ii O V5 AA A A E a
14. Features IEEE 802 3z compliant o IEEE 802 3x Flow Control in full duplex compliant IEEE 802 3u compliant IEEE 802 3ab compliant IEEE 802 1p Priority Queues e IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol support IEEE 802 1X Port based and MAC based Access Control IEEE 802 1Q VLAN IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree and IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree 1 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Single IP Management support Simple Network Time Protocol support System and Port Utilization support System Log Support Non blocking store and forward switching scheme capability to support rate adaptation and protocol conversion Supports by port Egress Ingress rate control Address table Supports up to 8K MAC addresses per device Port Trunking with flexible load distribution and fail over function IGMP Snooping support SNMP support SMTP support CPU Interface Filtering Port Mirroring support MIB support for RFC1213 MIB II RFC1493 Bridge RFC1757 RMON RFC1643 Ether like MIB RFC2233 Interface MIB RFC2358 Ether like MIB IF MIB Private MIB RFC2674 for 802 1p IEEE 802 1X MIB RS 232 DCE console port for Switch management Provides parallel LED display for port status such as link act speed etc DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Ethernet Technology Fast Ethernet The growing importance of LANs and the increasing complexity
15. Port Mirroring System Log Settings SNTP Settings MAC Notification Settings TFTP Services Ping Test SNMP Manager IP MAC Binding Single IP Setting Forwarding and Filtering SMTP Service DHCP BOOTP Relay 26 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Device Information The Device Information window shows the Switch s MAC Address assigned by the factory and unchangeable the Boot PROM Firmware Version and Hardware Version This information is helpful to keep track of PROM and firmware updates and to obtain the Switch s MAC address for entry into another network device s address table if necessary The user may also enter a System Name System Location and System Contact to aid in defining the Switch to the user s preference In addition this screen displays the status of functions on the Switch to quickly assess their current global status Three of these functions Spanning Tree Port Mirror and Single IP Management have a Detail settings link which when clicked will automatically flip to the configuration page for that feature This serves as a great quick reference for network administrators to promptly assess problems concerning Switch functions DES 3026 Ethernet Swatch None 2 None MAC Address Q0 1C FO 11 69 459 i 10 73 21 42 Manual E default subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Koot PROM Version Build 101 008 Build 4 20 B27 JBE JRE E Ea T
16. Switch Log DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual The Web manager allows the Switch s history log as compiled by the Switch s management agent to be viewed To view the Switch history log click Monitoring gt Switch Log sequence lime 0000 00 00 01 3732 0000 00 00 01 05 55 0000 00 00 00 44 39 0000 00 00 00 44 35 0000 00 00 00 7315 0000 00 00 00 00 31 0000 00 00 00 00 49 0000 00 00 00 00 14 0000 00 00 00 00 10 0000 00 00 00 00 10 0000 00 00 00 04 10 0000 00 00 00 03 40 0000 00 00 00 03 01 0000 00 00 00 00 58 0000 60 00 00 00 14 0000 00 00 00 00 10 0000 00 00 00 00 10 Log Text SoH server is enabled slccesshil login through Web Username Anonymous 12 10 5 21 1 MAC 00 1B FC 02 46 037 Successtal login through Web Username Anonymous 12 10 5 21 1 MAC 00 LBE FU 02 46 035 Logout through Web Username Anonymous IP 10075 21 1 MAC 00 1B FC 02 46 05 successtil login through Web Username Anonymous 1F 10 73 21 1 MAC00 LB FU 02 A6 03 Port 3 link up 100Mbps FULL duplex Port 3 lnk down System started up Port link up 100 Mbps FULL duplex Port 3 link up 100Mbps FULL duplex Conhtguration saved to flash by console Username Anonymous Firmware upgraded by console successtully Username Anonymous Firmware upgrade by console was unsuccesstul Username Anonymous successtil login through Console Username Anonymous System started up Po
17. both auto S0 EL 3 El 2 3600 no Disabled ia both auto al EL al El 2 S600 fe Disabled l both auto al 6 al El 2 S600 no Disabled ee eet auto S0 60 S0 Eji 2 3600 fe Disabled 20 both auto al 60 al al 2 3600 no Disabled El both auto al EL al El 2 S600 fe Disabled 22 both auto al 6 El El 2 S600 fo Disabled 23 both auto cid 60 3 al E 3600 no Disabled a4 both auto al bl El Eii 2 S600 no Disabled Figure 10 12 802 1X Authenticator Settings window To configure the settings by port click on the hyperlinked port number under the Port heading which will display the following table to configure 146 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual AdmDur Control r HuetPeriod Supp Timeout server Limeout r MaxReg tS rr O En m AuthPeriod 3600 Auth Disabled Forward EAPOL PDU Eoth Disabled vi g Show Authenticators Setting Figure 10 13 802 1X Authenticator Settings Modify window This screen allows you to set the following parameters Parameter Description To Use the drop down menu to enter the port or ports to be set AdmDir Sets the administrative controlled direction to either in or both
18. Ho Yes Disabled Disabled Enabled 12 Link Down Yes ZQ00000 128 Ho Yes Disabled DisabledEnabled 13 Link Down Yes 2 000000 148 Ho Yes Disabled DisabledEnabled 14 Link Down Yes 2000000 12 Ho Yes Disabled Disabled Enabled 15 Link Down Yes 2000000 148 Ho Yes Disabled Disabled Enabled 16 Link Down Yes 2ZQ00000 128 Ho Yes Disabled DisabledEnabled a Link Down Yes 2000000 12 Ho Yes Disabled Disabled Enabled 16 Link Down Yes 2000000 148 Ho Yes Disabled DisabledEnabled 19 Link Down Yes 2 000000 128 Ho Yes Disabled DisabledEnabled 0 Link Down Yes 2000000 148 Ho Yes Disabled DisabledEnabled 2l Link Down Yes 2000000 12 Ho Yes Disabled DisabledEnabled e Link Down Yes 2 000000 128 Ho Yes Disabled DisabledEnabled 23 Link Down Yes ZQ00000 1248 Ho Yes Disabled DisabledEnabled 4 Link Down Yes 2000000 148 Ho Yes Disabled Disabled Enabled 20 Link Down Yes ZQ00000 128 Ho Yes Disabled Disabled Enabled 6 Link Down Yes ZQ00000 128 Ho Yes Disabled DisabledEnabled Figure 7 18 STP Port Settings and Table window In addition to setting Spanning Tree parameters for use on the switch level the Switch allows for the configuration of groups of ports each port group of which will have its own spanning tree and will require some of its own configuration settings An STP Group will use the switch level parameters entered above with the addition of Port Priority and Port Cost An STP Group spanning tree works in the same way as the switch leve
19. Read Only Configuration Files fe Configuration Network Monitoring Community Strings and Trap Stations No system Utilities No User Account Management Figure 6 9 Admin and User Privileges Factory Reset After establishing a User Account with Admin level privileges be sure to save the changes by opening the Save Changes window in the Main Menu and clicking the Save Configuration button 36 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Password Encryption This window is used to control the password encryption on the Switch To enable or disable Password Encryption open Administration gt Password Encryption which will display the following window Password Encryption Status Disabled v Apply Figure 6 10 Password Encryption window Cable Diagnostics This window is used to control the cable diagnostics and determine where and what kind of errors have occurred on the cable This function is primarily used for administrators to view tests on copper cables To view the cable diagnostics open Administration gt Cable Diagnostics which will display the following window or BE Port Type Link Stats RR Cable Length 3 PE OR 5 Link Tp The cable diagnostics feature is designed primarily for administrators or customer sen ace representatives to verify and test copper cables it can rapidly determine the quality of the
20. Select P to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header VLAN Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding Source IP Mask Enter an IP address mask for the source IP address Destination IP Mask Enter an IP address mask for the destination IP address 124 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual DSCP Protocol Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the protocol type value in each frame s header You must then specify what protocol s to include according to the following guidelines Select ICMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field in each frame s header Select Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an ICMP type value or specify Code to further specify that the access profile will apply an ICMP code value Select IGMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP field in each frame s header Select Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an IGMP type value Select T
21. Single IP Setting Forwarding amp Filtering SMTP Service and DHCP BOOTP Relay Layer 2 Features Contains screens concerning configurations for Static VLAN Entry VLAN Trunk Settings Trunking IGMP Snooping Spanning Tree and Loopback Detection CoS Contains screens concerning configurations for Port Bandwidth 802 1p Default Priority 802 1p User Priority CoS Scheduling Mechanism CoS Output Scheduling Priority Settings TOS Priority Settings DSCP Priority Setttings Port Mapping Priority Settings and MAC Priority CPU Interface Filtering Contains screens concerning configurations for CPU Interface Filtering State and the CPU Interface Filtering Table Security Contains screens concerning configurations for Traffic Control Port Security Port Lock Entries 802 1 X Trusted Host Traffic Segmentation and SSH Monitoring Contains screens concerning monitoring the Switch pertaining to CPU Utilization Port Utilization Packets Packet Errors Packet Size VLAN Status MAC Address Switch Log Log Settings IGMP Snooping Group Browse Router Port Browse ARP Table and Session Table NOTE Be sure to configure the user name and password in the User Accounts menu before connecting the Switch to the greater network 25 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Administration Device Information IP Address Port Configuration User Accounts Password Encryption Cable Diagnostics
22. cnico tiene presencia en numerosos pa ses de la Regi n Latino Am rica y presta asistencia gratuita a todos los clientes de D Link en forma telef nica e internet a trav s de la casilla soporte dlinkla com Soporte T cnico Help Desk Argentina Tel fono 0800 12235465 Lunes a Viernes 09 00 am a 22 00 pm Soporte Tecnico Help Desk Chile Tel fono 800 8 35465 Lunes a Viernes 08 00 am a 21 00 pm Soporte Tecnico Help Desk Colombia Tel fono 01800 9525465 Lunes a Viernes 07 00 am a 20 00 pm Soporte T cnico Help Desk Costa Rica Tel fono 0800 0521478 Lunes a Viernes 06 00 am a 19 00 pm Soporte T cnico Help Desk Ecuador Tel fono 1800 035465 Lunes a Viernes 07 00 am a 20 00 pm Soporte T cnico Help Desk El Salvador Tel fono 800 6335 Lunes a Viernes 06 00 am a 19 00 pm Soporte T cnico Help Desk Guatemala Tel fono 1800 8350255 Lunes a Viernes 06 00 am a 19 00 pm Soporte T cnico Help Desk M xico Tel fono 01800 1233201 Lunes a Viernes 06 00 am a 19 00 Soporte T cnico Help Desk Panam Tel fono 011 008000 525465 Lunes a Viernes 07 00 am a 20 00 pm Soporte T cnico Help Desk Per Tel fono 0800 00968 Lunes a Viernes 07 00 am a 20 00 pm Soporte T cnico Help Desk Venezuela Tel fono 0800 1005767 Lunes a Viernes 07 30 am a 20 30 pm D Link Building Networks for People Suporte T cnico Voc pode encontrar atualizac es de software e documentac o de usu rio no site da D Link Brasil www dlinkbrasil com br
23. 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual e Observe extension cable and power strip ratings Make sure that the total ampere rating of all products plugged into the extension cable or power strip does not exceed 80 percent of the ampere ratings limit for the extension cable or power strip e To help protect your system from sudden transient increases and decreases in electrical power use a surge suppressor line conditioner or uninterruptible power supply UPS e Position system cables and power cables carefully route cables so that they cannot be stepped on or tripped over Be sure that nothing rests on any cables e Do not modify power cables or plugs Consult a licensed electrician or your power company for site modifications Always follow your local national wiring rules e When connecting or disconnecting power to hot pluggable power supplies if offered with your system observe the following guidelines Install the power supply before connecting the power cable to the power supply Unplug the power cable before removing the power supply If the system has multiple sources of power disconnect power from the system by unplugging all power cables from the power supplies e Move products with care ensure that all casters and or stabilizers are firmly connected to the system Avoid sudden stops and uneven surfaces General Precautions for Rack Mountable Products Observe the following
24. 3016 DES 3026 A solid green LED will indicate a valid link at 100Mbps and when blinking indicates the port is currently transferring data A solid amber LED will indicate a valid link at 10Mbps and when blinking indicates the port is currently transferring data DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Rear Panel Description The rear panels of these switches contain an AC power connector AC LINE 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 0 3A MAX E Figure 1 8 Rear Panel of the DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G AC LINE 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 0 3 A MAX Figure 1 9 Rear Panel of the DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Side Panel Description Both panels of the Switch contain a heat vent used to dissipate heat Do not block these openings and leave at least 6 inches of space at the rear and sides of the Switch for proper ventilation Be reminded that without proper heat dissipation and air circulation system components might overheat which could lead to system failure a J La La p00005b6 CORA po000000pb LAE inin iniri AE po0000cpo QUE ALEC po00000Ccp GELES pod o0ooo po000006p CUIDAR pod o0oon p00I0005b6 CIAO p000000p po00I005b ITA p000000pb pod iniri POT pO00000cp GQ AEE E E E i pPO0000000 CODA rr Bah Ges aoooao aoaeaac atood Oto ot Of Oo ar Figure 1 10 Side panel view DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 30
25. 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual The page shown below is the Packet Content Mask configuration window Profile 1D Packet Conte nt Offset 0 15 Offset 16 31 Offset _ 64 79 Show All CEU Interface Filtering Table Entries Figure 9 5 CPU Interface Filtering Configuration window Packet Content This screen will aid the user in configuring the Switch to mask packet headers beginning with the offset value specified The following fields are used to configure the Packet Content Mask Parameter Description Profile ID 1 3 Type in a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 1 3 Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IP address or packet content mask This will change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select P to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header This field will instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified value 0 15 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from the beginning of the packet to the 15th byte value 16 31 Enter a v
26. 9 11 CPU Interface Filtering Rule Configuration IP Configure the following Access Rule Configuration settings for IP Parameter Description Profile ID This is the identifier number for this profile set Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 1 5 Type Selected profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IP address or Packet Content Ethernet instructs the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header IP instructs the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header 129 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual PF Packet Content Mask instructs the Switch to examine the packet header VLAN Name Allows the entry of a name for a previously configured VLAN Source IP Source IP Address Enter an IP Address mask for the source IP address Destination IP Destination IP Address Enter an IP Address mask for the destination IP address DSCP 0 63 Enter the DSCP bit for which to identify incoming packets The user may choose a DSCP bit between 0 63 The Access Rule may be configured on a per port basis by entering the port number of the Switch into this f
27. 90 with a subnet mask of 255 0 0 0 and a default gateway of 0 0 0 0 To use the BOOTP or DHCP protocols to assign the Switch an IP address subnet mask and default gateway address Use the Get IP From lt Manual gt pull down menu to choose from BOOTP or DHCP This selects how the Switch will be assigned an IP address on the next reboot The IP Address Settings are Parameter Description BOOTP The Switch will send out a BOOTP broadcast request when it is powered up The BOOTP protocol allows IP addresses network masks and default gateways to be assigned by a central BOOTP 28 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual server If this option is set the Switch will first look for a BOOTP server to provide it with this information before using the default or previously entered settings The Switch will send out a DHCP broadcast request when it is powered up The DHCP protocol allows IP addresses network masks and default gateways to be assigned by a DHCP server If this option is set the Switch will first look for a DHCP server to provide it with this information before using the default or previously entered settings Allows the entry of an IP address Subnet Mask and a Default Gateway for the Switch These fields should be of the form xxx xxx xxx xxx where each xxx is a number represented in decimal form between 0 and 255 This address should be a unique address on the network assigne
28. ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THE SOLE REMEDY FORA BREACH OF THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY IS REPAIR REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE DEFECTIVE OR NON CONFORMING PRODUCT THE MAXIMUM LIABILITY OF D LINK UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT COVERED BY THE WARRANTY THE FOREGOING EXPRESS WRITTEN WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES OR REMEDIES EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY Governing Law This Limited Warranty shall be governed by the laws of the State of California Some states do not allow exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts so the foregoing limitations and exclusions may not apply This Limited Warranty provides specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state Trademarks D Link is a registered trademark of D Link Systems Inc Other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Copyright Statement No part of this publication or documentation accompanying this product may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative such as translation transformation or adaptation without permission from D Link Corporation D Link Systems Inc as stipulated by the United States Copyright Act of 1976 and any amendments thereto Contents are subject to change without prior notice Copyright 2005 by D Link
29. Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Network access controlled port 1 Network access uncontrolled port Figure 10 10 Example of Typical Port Based Configuration Once the connected device has successfully been authenticated the Port then becomes Authorized and all subsequent traffic on the Port is not subject to access control restriction until an event occurs that causes the Port to become Unauthorized Hence if the Port is actually connected to a shared media LAN segment with more than one attached device successfully authenticating one of the attached devices effectively provides access to the LAN for all devices on the shared segment Clearly the security offered in this situation is open to attack 144 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual MAC Based Network Access Control S RADIUS Server Ethernet Switch e e ood ae A ae A A A A A A AA PE HE 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Network access controlled port C1 Network access uncontrolled port Figure 10 11 Example of Typical MAC Based Configuration In order to successfully make use of 802 1X in a shared media LAN segment it would be necessary to create logical Ports one for each attached device that required
30. Control security method Authentication Client Authenticator Server NIC Card Network Port AAA Server Ethenet9023 P 00 Access Point Any EAP Server Mostly RADIUS Wireless PC Card y eit Ethernet Switch etc EAP Over LAN Encapsulated EAP EAP Over Wireless Messages typically on RADIUS 802 3 or 802 11 Figure 10 5 The three roles of 802 1X The following section will explain the three roles of Client Authenticator and Authentication Server in greater detail 140 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Authentication Server The Authentication Server is a remote device that is connected to the same network as the Client and Authenticator must be running a RADIUS Server program and must be configured properly on the Authenticator Switch Clients connected to a port on the Switch must be authenticated by the Authentication Server RADIUS before attaining any services offered by the Switch on the LAN The role of the Authentication Server is to certify the identity of the Client attempting to access the network by exchanging secure information between the RADIUS server and the Client through EAPOL packets and in turn informs the Switch whether or not the Client is granted access to the LAN and or switches services Authentication Server Switch Figure 10 6 The Authentication Server Authenticator The Authenticator the Switch is an
31. Corporation D Link Systems Inc All rights reserved CE Mark Warning This is a Class B product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures FCC Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communication However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help For detailed warranty information applicable to products purchased outside the United States please contact the corresponding local D Link office Product R
32. Disabled 6 Disabled Disabled 9 Disabled Disabled 10 Disabled Disabled 11 Disabled Disabled 12 Disabled Disabled 13 Disabled Disabled 14 Disabled Disabled 15 Disabled Disabled l Disabled Disabled 17 Disabled Disabled ls Disabled Disabled 15 Disabled Disabled al Disabled Disabled 21 Disabled Disabled E Disabled Disabled E Disabled Disabled 24 Disabled Disabled 25 Disabled Disabled 26 Disabled Disabled Figure 6 32 IP MAC Binding Ports window When IP MAC Binding Ports are enabled use the IP MAC Binding menu to configure the IP MAC binding as applied to the enabled ports IP MAC Binding Table The IP MAC Binding Table can be used to create IP MAC binding entries Enter the IP and MAC addresses of the authorized users in the appropriate fields and click Add To use IP MAC binding to check on specific 56 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual ports the ports must first be enabled in the IP MAC Binding Ports menu see above The ports are specified in the Port field as a range of integers for example 1 3 or select the All option to apply to all ports To view this table click Administration gt IP MAC Binding gt IP MAC Binding Table Address Eindmg Trap Log TP Address MAC Address Port 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 Aro l Total Entries 0 TP Address MAC Addres
33. ERS ce MAC 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Show All CPU Interface Filtering Eule Entries Figure 9 8 CPU Interface Filtering Rule Configuration Ethernet 127 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual To set the Access Rule for Ethernet adjust the following parameters and click Apply Parameters Description Profile ID This is the identifier number for this profile set Select Permit to specify that packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Type in a unique identifier number for this access and priority This value can be set from 1 5 Type Selected profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IP address or Packet Content Ethernet instructs the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header IP instructs the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Packet Content Mask instructs the Switch to examine the packet header Ethernet Type Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets with this hexadecimal 802 10 Ethernet type value hex Ox0 Oxffff in the packet header The Ethernet
34. Fast Ethernet Switch Manual General Standards Protocols Data Transfer Rates Ethernet Fast Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet Network Cables 10BASE T 100BASE TX Number of Ports IEEE 802 3 10BASE T Ethernet IEEE 802 3u 100BASE TX Fast Ethernet IEEE 802 3z 1000BASE SX Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802 3ab 1000BASE T Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802 1 D w Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1X Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802 1 p Q VLAN IEEE 802 3x Full duplex Flow Control IEEE 802 3 Nway auto negotiation CSMA CD Half duplex Full duplex 10 Mbps 20Mbps 100Mbps 200Mbps n a 2000Mbps 2 pair UTP Cat 3 4 5 100 m ElA TIA 568 100 ohm STP 100 m 2 pair UTP Cat 5 100 m ElA TIA 568 100 ohm STP 100 m DES 3010F FL 8 x 10 100 Mbps NWay ports 1 x 1000BASE T Gigabit Port 1 x 100BASE FX Fiber Optic Port DES 3010G 8 x 10 100 Mbps NWay ports 1 x 1000BASE T Gigabit Port 1 x SFP Fiber Optic Port DES 3016 16 x 10 100 Mbps NWay ports DES 3018 16 x 10 100 Mbps NWay ports 2 Optional Module Slots DES 3026 24 x 10 100 Mbps NWay ports 2 Optional Module Slots DEM 301T Optional Module 1 x 1000BASE T Gigabit Port DEM 201F Optional Module 1 x 100BASE FX Multi Mode Fiber Port DEM 201FL Optional Module 1 x 100BASE FX Single Mode Fiber Port DEM 301G Optional Module 1 SFP Gigabit Port 201 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manua
35. Figure 6 41 Right Clicking a Group Icon The following options may appear for the user to configure Collapse to collapse the group that will be represented by a single icon Expand to expand the SIM group in detail Property to pop up a window to display the group information Property Device Name defaulted 3e 78 Module Mame Group Mac Address 00 1 3 46 ED 3E 78 Remote Port Ma Local Port Mo Port Speed Close fee Applet Window Figure 6 42 Property window Commander Switch Icon Figure 6 43 Right Clicking a Commander Icon 65 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual The following options may appear for the user to configure Collapse to collapse the group that will be represented by a single icon Expand to expand the SIM group in detail Property to pop up a window to display the group information Property Device Marne default 05 05 00 Module Marne DGS 3324SR LS Switch hac Address 00 06 01 05 05 00 Remote Port Ho J Local Port Mao 24 Port Speed OO F ull Close E Applet Window Figure 6 44 Property window Member Switch Icon Tm 4d Collapse Remove from group 4 id da Remove from group Configure Property Configure Property o r j Figure 6 45 Right Clicking a Member icon The following options may appear for the user to configure Collapse to collapse the
36. Font manual Initial capital letter Indicates a window name Names of keys on the keyboard have initial capitals For example Click Enter Italics Indicates a window name or a field Also can indicate a variables or parameter that is replaced with an appropriate word or string For example type filename means that you should type the actual filename instead of the word shown in italic Menu Name gt Menu Menu Name gt Menu Option Indicates the menu structure Device gt Port gt Port Option Properties means the Port Properties menu option under the Port menu option that is located under the Device menu Notes Notices and Cautions A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your device A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage personal injury or death DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Safety Instructions Use the following safety guidelines to ensure your own personal safety and to help protect your system from potential damage Throughout this safety section the caution icon 4 is used to indicate cautions and precautions that you need to review and follow Safety Cautions To reduce the risk of bodily injury electrical shock fire or damage to the equipment observe the following precautions e Obser
37. Forwarding Packet forwarding decisions are made based upon the following three types of rules Ingress rules rules relevant to the classification of received frames belonging to a VLAN Forwarding rules between ports decides whether to filter or forward the packet ingress Rules Applied Egress Rules Applied Egress rules determines if the packet must be sent tagged or untagged Forwarding Process Filtering Database Port State Tagging or Untagging Applied ke Figure 7 1 IEEE 802 1Q Packet Forwarding 802 1Q VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the EtherType field When a packet s EtherType field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 1Q standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLANs can be identified The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is reta
38. If in is selected control is only exerted over incoming traffic through the port you selected in the first field If both is selected control is exerted over both incoming and outgoing traffic through the controlled port selected in the first field PortControl This allows you to control the port authorization state Select forceAuthorized to disable 802 1X and cause the port to transition to the authorized state without any authentication exchange required This means the port transmits and receives normal traffic without 802 1X based authentication of the client If forceUnauthorized is selected the port will remain in the unauthorized state ignoring all attempts by the client to authenticate The Switch cannot provide authentication services to the client through the interface If Auto is selected it will enable 802 1X and cause the port to begin in the unauthorized state allowing only EAPOL frames to be sent and received through the port The authentication process begins when the link state of the port transitions from down to up or when an EAPOL start frame is received The Switch then requests the identity of the client and begins relaying authentication messages between the client and the authentication server The default setting is Auto TxPeriod This sets the TxPeriod of time for the authenticator PAE state machine This value determines the period of an EAP Request Identity packet transmitted to the client The default sett
39. Link further warrants that during the Software Warranty Period the magnetic media on which D Link delivers the Software will be free of physical defects The customer s sole and exclusive remedy and the entire liability of D Link and its suppliers under this Limited Warranty will be at D Link s option to replace the non conforming Software or defective media with software that substantially conforms to D Link s functional specifications for the Software or to refund the portion of the actual purchase price paid that is attributable to the Software Except as otherwise agreed by D Link in writing the replacement Software is provided only to the original licensee and is subject to the terms and conditions of the license granted by D Link for the Software Replacement Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original Warranty Period and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions If a material non conformance is incapable of correction or if D Link determines in its sole discretion that it is not practical to replace the non conforming Software the price paid by the original licensee for the non conforming Software will be refunded by D Link provided that the non conforming Software and all copies thereof is first returned to D Link The license granted respecting any Software for which a refund is given automatically terminates Non Applicability of Warranty The Limited Warranty provided hereunder for Hardware and Software portions
40. Port Lock Entries The Port Lock Entry Delete window is used to remove an entry from the port security entries learned by the Switch and entered into the forwarding database To view the following window click Security gt Port Lock Entries Port Lock Entries Tabl default 00 0s 02 0b 85 d2 Permanent default 00 0s 02 54 10 0a Permanent default 00 0c 6e 12 el 1a Permanent default D0 50 6d 26 94 95 Permanent default D00 50 ba 00 06 03 Permanent default 00 50 ba da 00 22 Permanent default D0 e0 16 2 Ud e6 Permanent x x e e Figure 10 3 Port Lock Entries Table This function is only operable 1f the Mode in the Port Security window is selected as Permanent or DeleteOnReset or in other words only addresses that are permanently learned by the Switch can be deleted Once the entry has been defined by entering the correct information into the window above click the under the Delete heading of the corresponding MAC address to be deleted Click the Next button to view the next page of entries listed in this table This window displays the following information Parameter Description VID The VLAN ID of the entry in the forwarding database table that has been permanently learned by the Switch VLAN NAME The VLAN Name of the entry in the forwarding database table that has been permanently learned by the Switch MAC Address The MAC address of the entry in the forwarding database table that has been permanently learned by the
41. SNMP is an OSI Layer 7 Application Layer designed specifically for managing and monitoring network devices SNMP enables network management stations to read and modify the settings of gateways routers switches and other network devices Use SNMP to configure system features for proper operation monitor performance and detect potential problems in the Switch switch group or network Managed devices that support SNMP include software referred to as an agent which runs locally on the device A defined set of variables managed objects is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device These objects are defined in a Management Information Base MIB which provides a standard presentation of the information controlled by the on board SNMP agent SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information over the network The DES 3000 Switch Series supports the SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 You can specify which version of the SNMP you want to use to monitor and control the Switch The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device In SNMP v l and v 2 user authentication is accomplished using community strings which function like passwords The remote user SNMP application and the Switch SNMP must use the same community string SNMP packets from any station that has not been authenticated are ignored dropped The defa
42. Service Office The replacement hardware need not be new or have an identical make model or part D Link may at its option replace the defective Hardware or any part thereof with any reconditioned product that D Link reasonably determines is substantially equivalent or superior in all material respects to the defective Hardware Repaired or replacement hardware will be warranted for the remainder of the original Warranty Period or ninety 90 days whichever is longer and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions If a material defect is incapable of correction or if D Link determines that it is not practical to repair or replace the defective Hardware the actual price paid by the original purchaser for the defective Hardware will be refunded by D Link upon return to D Link of the defective Hardware All Hardware or part thereof that is replaced by D Link or for which the purchase price is refunded shall become the property of D Link upon replacement or refund Limited Software Warranty D Link warrants that the software portion of the product Software will substantially conform to D Link s then current functional specifications for the Software as set forth in the applicable documentation from the date of original retail purchase of the Software for a period of ninety 90 days Software Warranty Period provided that the Software is properly installed on approved hardware and operated as contemplated in its documentation D
43. Supplicant has successfully authenticated to the Authentication Server Counts the number of times that the state machine receives a Reject message from the Authentication Server i e aFail becomes TRUE causing a transition from RESPONSE to FAIL Indicates that the Supplicant has not authenticated to the Authentication Server Auth Session Statistics This table contains the session statistics objects for the Authenticator PAE associated with each port An entry appears in this table for each port that supports the Authenticator function To view the Authenticator Session Statistics click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt Auth Session Statistics Authenticator Session Statistics Tirne Interval EMD 1 D 0 a SupplicantLogott 4 i i 1 SupplicantLogoff SupplicantLogott SupplicantLogoft SupplicantLogott SupplicantLogott SupplicantLogott SupplicantLogott SupplicantLogoff SupplicantLogott SupplicantLogott SupplicantLogott SupplicantLogoft SupplicantLogott SuUpplicantLogott SupplicantLogoff SupplicantLogoff SupplicantLogott SupplicantLogott SupplicantLogoff SupplicantLogott SupplicantLogott SupplicantLogoff Supplicantloa of Figure 11 26 Authenticator Session Counter window 191 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual The user may select the desired time interval to update the statistics between s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value 1s on
44. Switch The ID number of the port that has permanently learned the MAC address Type The type of MAC address in the forwarding database table Only entries marked Secured_Permanent can be deleted Click the in this field to delete the corresponding MAC address that was permanently learned by the Switch 139 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual 302 1X 802 1X Port Based and MAC Based Access Control The IEEE 802 1X standard is a security measure for authorizing and authenticating users to gain access to various wired or wireless devices on a specified Local Area Network by using a Client and Server based access control model This is accomplished by using a RADIUS server to authenticate users trying to access a network by relaying Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL packets between the Client and the Server The following figure represents a basic EAPOL packet Ethernet Frame Destination 018002 000003 pe I Protocol version Packet body EAPOL packet Figure 10 4 The EAPOL Packet Utilizing this method unauthorized devices are restricted from connecting to a LAN through a port to which the user is connected EAPOL packets are the only traffic that can be transmitted through the specific port until authorization is granted The 802 1X Access Control method has three roles each of which are vital to creating and maintaining a stable and working Access
45. Table Secure Shell SSH SSH is an abbreviation of Secure Shell which is a program allowing secure remote login and secure network services over an insecure network It allows a secure login to remote host computers a safe method of executing commands on a remote end node and will provide secure encrypted and authenticated communication between two non trusted hosts SSH with its array of unmatched security features is an essential tool in today s networking environment It 1s a powerful guardian against numerous existing security hazards that now threaten network communications The steps required to use the SSH protocol for secure communication between a remote PC the SSH client and the Switch the SSH server are as follows 1 Create a user account with admin level access using the User Accounts window in the Security Management folder This is identical to creating any other admin level User Account on the Switch including specifying a password This password is used to logon to the Switch once a secure communication path has been established using the SSH protocol 2 Configure the User Account to use a specified authorization method to identify users that are allowed to establish SSH connections with the Switch using the SSH User Authentication window There are three choices as to the method SSH will use to authorize the user which are Host Based Password and Public Key 3 Configure the encryption algorithm that SSH will use
46. The Switch uses the standard MIB II Management Information Base module Consequently values for MIB objects can be retrieved from any SNMP based network management software In addition to the standard MIB II the Switch also supports its own proprietary enterprise MIB as an extended Management Information Base The proprietary MIB may also be retrieved by specifying the MIB Object Identifier MIB values can be either read only or read write The DES 3000 Series Switch incorporates a flexible SNMP management for the switching environment SNMP management can be customized to suit the needs of the networks and the preferences of the network administrator Use the SNMP V3 menus to select the SNMP version used for specific tasks The DES 3000 Series Switch supports the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 The administrator can specify the SNMP version used to monitor and control the Switch The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device SNMP settings are configured using the menus located on the SNMP V3 folder of the web manager Workstations on the network that are allowed SNMP privileged access to the Switch can be restricted with the Management Station IP Address menu 46 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual SNMP Trap Settings The following window is used to enable and disable trap settings for th
47. This window allows you to reauthenticate a port or group of ports by choosing a port or group of ports by using the pull down menus From and To and clicking Apply The Reauthenticate Port Table displays the current status of the reauthenticated port s once you have clicked Apply To view the following window click Security gt 802 1X gt Reauthenticate Port s From To Ay Port Port iv Force Auth SUCCESS Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Figure 10 20 Reauthenticate Port and Reauthenticate Port Table window 154 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual This window displays the following information Parameter Description Pot The port number of the reauthenticated port Auth State The Authenticator State will display one of the following nitialize Disconnected Connecting Authenticating Authenticated Aborting Held ForceAuth or ForceUnauth BackendState The Backend State will display one of the following Request Response Success Fail Timeout Idle or Initialize OpenDir The Operational Controlled Directions are both and in The status of the controlled port can be Authorized or Unauthorized NOTE The user must first globally enable 802 1X in the DES 3026 Web Management Tool window befor
48. To view the following window click Administration gt Port Configuration gt Port Error Disabled Figure 6 5 Port Error Disabled window The following information can be viewed in the preceding window Parameter Description Pot Denotes the port on the Switch that has been disabled State Describes the current running state of the port in question whether enabled or disabled Connection Describes the current running state of the port in question This field will read err disabled when a port has been disabled due to connection errors Reason Describes the reason for the error of the current running state of the port which is exceeding the Packet Storm Control threshold Displays the pre configured description of the port configured by the user 34 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual User Accounts Use the User Accounts Management window to control user privileges of different accounts on the Switch To view existing User Accounts click Administration gt User Accounts Total Entries l User Name Ris Admin Madity Figure 6 6 User Accounts window To add a new user click on the Add button To modify or delete an existing user click on the Modify button for that user arem EE Confirm New Password rcess Right Admin show All User Account Entries
49. User Name must be a previously configured user account on the Switch Auth Mode The administrator may choose one of the following to set the authorization for users attempting to access the Switch Host Based This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use a remote SSH server for authentication purposes Choosing this parameter requires the user to input the following information to identify the SSH user e Host Name Enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 32 characters to identify the remote SSH user e Host P Enter the corresponding IP address of the SSH user Password This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use an administrator defined password for authentication Upon entry of this parameter the Switch will prompt the administrator for a password and then to re type the password for confirmation Public Key This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use the publickey on a SSH server for authentication Enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 32 characters to identify the remote SSH user This parameter is only used in conjunction with the Host Based choice in the Auth Mode field Enter the corresponding IP address of the SSH user This parameter is only used in conjunction with the Host Based choice in the Auth Mode field Click Apply to implement changes made 164 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026
50. a a a E N beaks 3 Front Panel Components and LED DICO iS E E A dads 5 Rear Panel Desci phi oisin A E E E O E E EE O E Runsan ta vstceie tags 7 Side Panel DES COPIAN A NA EE T E AN NE E E N S T 7 salinana AE E E E NE ve TR PPP Ba ACCC OE ee ad at ee le er cal ata do 8 Before Y DU Connect tothe Netw oa da dd it 8 IMstalliMio the Switch without Me Radisson AA AAA AAA A AA AA A 9 InstalliMio THES WC IA R ACK LA AAA A AA AAA AAA AAA ace Cain AAA AR 9 Mountins the Switch ina Standard 19 Rania ad tii AA AAA A AAA AAA A A Es 9 POWER dE Mele chet IU E A A AAA A oia 9 EGU Oma MOISES SAA AAA AAA ARAS AAA 10 CONNECUONS the SICA A A A MZ SWicnto End Nod a o ta ld do deta tdo ao MOT AE PROM loa E EAs 12 SAS Ao lolo o WC 1 eG tise parcels haa EA E II II IIA A EEEE 13 DES 3010F FL G DES 3016 DES 3018 or DES 3026 as a Network Backbone oocooccoccncccnccnccnccnncnnccnccnoronocnnconconconconccnncnnconconccnnnnn 14 Introd ction t Switch Management A o MAA MACH O PIS ana thc el at aces lL a id stl Sia el ceo alde 15 Web Dascd Mana coment ILC EAC asror hence tes een a AE A A Ei Ii ideado dais de 15 SNMP Based Mana CHIN ri A SA A ao 15 Command Lane Console Intertace throush tie Serial POC at ti ibi ia ARIS 15 Connecting the Comsole FOrt RSS 57 DCB str last ines hada 15 Pisti mme Connectno to The Wins dl o to eet eta 17 PASS MOLA Pr o a a dep atnbaaadnuaaad se auaaeadeuneaey ata sn wiegueesaeatuuanscnass 18 INVITE SEO Sl cis eds ened elas
51. access to the LAN The Switch would regard the single physical Port connecting it to the shared media segment as consisting of a number of distinct logical Ports each logical Port being independently controlled from the point of view of EAPOL exchanges and authorization state The Switch learns each attached devices individual MAC addresses and effectively creates a logical Port that the attached device can then use to communicate with the LAN via the Switch 145 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual 802 1X Authenticator Settings To configure the 802 1X authenticator settings click Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X Authenticator Settings Eor aerat E rod Timeout Time out TS Poriod i daa EAPOL PDU 1 both auto al 10 S0 Eii 2 S600 o Disabled E both auto cil 60 El al Z 3600 no Disabled El both auto al EL al El 2 S600 fe Disabled 4 both auto al EL al El 2 S600 fe Disabled 3 both auto al 60 S0 Eji 2 3600 o Disabled 6 both auto al 60 al aL 2 S600 no Disabled F both auto al EL al El 2 S600 fe Disabled ES both auto E 60 al S0 a S600 fe Disabled E both auto 3 60 S0 Eii 2 3600 no Disabled 10 both auto al 6 al El 2 S600 fe Disabled 11 both auto al EL S0 El 2 S600 no Disabled 12 both auto 3 60 al cis 2 3600 o Disabled 13 both auto 3 60 a0 El 2 3600 no Disabled 14 both auto al EL al El 2 S600 fe Disabled 15 both auto al 60 SU al 2 3600 o Disabled l
52. and tighten the captive retaining screws Connect the other end of the cable to a terminal or to the serial connector of a computer running terminal emulation software Set the terminal emulation software as follows Select the appropriate serial port COM port 1 or COM port 2 Set the data rate to 9600 baud Set the data format to 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Set flow control to none Under Properties select VT100 for Emulation mode Select Terminal keys for Function Arrow and Ctrl keys Ensure that you select Terminal keys not Windows keys NOTE When you use HyperTerminal with the Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system ensure that you have Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later installed Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 allows you to use arrow keys in HyperTerminal s WT100 emulation See www microsoft com for information on Windows 2000 service packs After you have correctly set up the terminal plug the power cable into the power receptacle on the back of the Switch The boot sequence appears in the terminal After the boot sequence completes the console login screen displays If you have not logged into the command line interface CLI program press the Enter key at the User Name and password prompts There 1s no default user name and password for the Switch User names and passwords must first be created by the administrator If you have previously set up user accounts log in and continue to configure the S
53. and servers to Gigabit Ethernet can greatly improve network response times as well as significantly speed up the traffic between your sub networks Gigabit Ethernet enables fast optical fiber connections to support video conferencing complex imaging and similar data intensive applications Likewise since data transfers occur 10 times faster than Fast Ethernet servers outfitted with Gigabit Ethernet NIC s are able to perform 10 times the number of operations in the same amount of time In addition the phenomenal bandwidth delivered by Gigabit Ethernet 1s the most cost effective method to take advantage of today s and tomorrow s rapidly improving switching and routing internetworking technologies Switching Technology Another key development pushing the limits of Ethernet technology is in the field of switching technology A switch bridges Ethernet packets at the MAC address level of the Ethernet protocol transmitting among connected Ethernet or Fast Ethernet LAN segments Switching is a cost effective way of increasing the total network capacity available to users on a local area network A switch increases capacity and decreases network loading by making it possible for a local area network to be divided into different segments which are not competing with each other for network transmission capacity and therefore decreasing the load on each segment The Switch acts as a high speed selective bridge between the individual segments Traff
54. authentication server that the client shares a secret with To view the RADIUS Accounting click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt RADIUS Accounting Clear T da E Pi ir Number Figure 11 24 RADIUS Accounting window 66 99 S The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics between s and 60s where stands for seconds The default value is one second To clear the current statistics shown click the Clear button in the top left hand corner The following fields can be viewed Parameter Description Server IP Addr The IP address assigned to each RADIUS Accounting server that the client shares a secret with UDP Port The UDP port the client is using to send requests to this server Timeouts The number of accounting timeouts to this server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as an Accounting Request as well as a timeout Requests The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent This does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this server RoundTripTime The time interval between the most recent Accounting Response and the Accounting Request that matched it from this RADIUS accounting server AccessRetrans The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retra
55. cables and the types of error Note l If cable length is displayed as M A it means the cable length is Mot Available This is due to the FE port beme unable to obtain cable lengthfeither because its link partner is powered otf or the cables used are broken and or bad in quality 2 The maximum cable length is limited to 120 meters 4 Deviation is H 5 meters therefore Mo Cable may be displayed under Test Result when the cable used is less than 5 m in length 4 It also measures cable fault and identities the fault in length according to the distance trom this switch Figure 6 11 Cable Diagnostics window To view the cable diagnostics for a particular port use the drop down menu to choose the port and click Test Now the information will be displayed in the Cable Diagnostics table 37 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Port Mirroring The Switch allows you to copy frames transmitted and received on a port and redirect the copies to another port You can attach a monitoring device to the mirrored port such as a sniffer or an RMON probe to view details about the packets passing through the first port This is useful for network monitoring and troubleshooting purposes To view the Port Mirroring window click Administration gt Port Mirroring Target Pot e co gt lt SoucePor fi e B 4 5 6 178 9 ho 111213 2425 hs 171819 20 21 29 23 24 25 26 Minn OCODODOOODOOO
56. can request SNMP messages SNMP Version V1 Indicates that SNMP version 1 is in use V2 Indicates that SNMP version 2 is in use V3 Indicates that SNMP version 3 is in use Auth Protocol None Indicates that no authorization protocol is in use MD5 Indicates that the HMAC MD5 96 authentication level will be used SHA Indicates that the HMAC SHA authentication protocol will be used Priv Protocol None Indicates that no authorization protocol is in use DES Indicates that DES 56 bit encryption is in use based on the CBC DES DES 56 standard To return to the SNMP User Table click the Show All SNMP User Table Entries link To add a new entry to the SNMP User Table Configuration click on the Add button on the SNMP User Table page This will open the SNMP User Table Configuration page as shown below Denm SS SNMP V3 Encryption Jencrypted Auth Protocol Password fs Priv Protocol Password Show All SHME User Table Entries Figure 6 23 SNMP User Table Configuration window The following parameters can set Parameter Description UserName Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the SNMP user This name is used to specify the SNMP group created can request SNMP messages SNMP Encryption Click the encrypted check box to enable encryption for the SNMP protocol This feature is for users utilizing the SNMP V3 version The user may configure the encryption in the follo
57. change the default Switch IP address to meet the specification of your networking address scheme The IP address for the Switch must be set before it can be managed with the Web based manager The Switch IP address can be automatically set using BOOTP or DHCP protocols in which case the actual address assigned to the Switch must be known The IP address may be set using the Command Line Interface CLI over the console serial port as follows e Starting at the command line prompt enter the commands config ipif System ipaddress xxx xxx xxx xxx yyy yyy yyy yyy Where the x s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the y s represent the corresponding subnet mask Alternatively you can enter config ipif System ipaddress xxx xxx xxx xxx z Where the x s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the z represents the corresponding number of subnets in CIDR notation The IP interface named System on the Switch can be assigned an IP address and subnet mask which can then be used to connect a management station to the Switch s Telnet or Web based management agent The system message Success indicates that the command was executed successfully The Switch can now be configured and managed via Telnet and the CLI or via the Web based management agent using the above IP address to connect to the Switch 30 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switc
58. click Administration gt SNMP Manager gt SNMP Host Table SNMP Host Table Host IP Address SIIVIP Version Community Name SNMPy3 User Name Vi 10 0 0 0 public Figure 6 30 SNMP Host Table To delete an existing SNMP Host Table entry click the corresponding button under the Delete heading To add a new entry to the Switch s SNMP Host Table click the Add button in the upper left hand corner of the page This will open the SNMP Host Table Configuration page as shown below Host LP Address SVP Version Community String SNMPw3 User Name how All SNMP Host Table Entries Figure 6 30 SNMP Host Table Configuration window The following parameters can set Parameter Description Host IP Address Type the IP address of the remote management station that will serve as the SNMP host for the Switch SNMP Version V1 To specifies that SNMP version 1 will be used V2 To specify that SNMP version 2 will be used V3 NoAuth NoPriv To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used with a NoAuth NoPriv security level V3 Auth NoPriv To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used with an Auth NoPriv security level V3 Auth Priv To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used with an Auth Priv security level Community String or Type in the community string or SNMP V3 user name as appropriate SNMP V3 User Name To implement your new settings c
59. configuring the maximum number of packets allowed to be transmitted from a given priority class of service and the maximum amount of time a given priority class of service will have to wait before being allowed to transmit its accumulated packets This establishes a Class of Service CoS for each of the Switch s four hardware priority classes of service The possible weight value range is 1 to 55 packets In networking environments that use alternative priority protocols the Switch s CoS can be mapped to accommodate DSCP priority and Type of Service ToS priority CoS can also be mapped to specified destination MAC addresses or ports on the Switch 111 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Port Bandwidth The bandwidth control settings are used to place a ceiling on the transmitting and receiving data rates for any selected port To view this table click CoS gt Port Bandwidth Poti M Porti Both v Disabled w 54 Port RX Rate TX Rate Effe ctive RX Effe ctive TX EK bit sec Khit sec Khit sec Khit sec 1 no hrut no hrut no hrut no lint E no lirit no lrnit no lirrit no lrnit E no hrut no hrut no hrut no lint 4 no lirit no limit no lirrit no lint 5 no lirit no hrrit no birrat no lrrit no hrut no hrut no hrut no lint F no lirat no birrat no birrat no lrrnit z no hrut no hrut no hrut no lint 3 no lirat no birrat no birrat no lrrit 10 no hrut no h
60. device The maximum number of IP MAC Binding entries is 500 The creation of authorized users can be manually configured by CLI or Web The function is port based this means a user can enable or disable the function on the individual port IP MAC Port Binding IMPB The IP MAC Ports Settings menu is used to enable IP MAC binding on a per port basis Ports that are enabled will apply the IP MAC check to ingress packets for the port The IP MAC database used for the check must be set up with the IP MAC Port Binding Table see below This table is used to enable or disable IP MAC binding on specific ports Select a port or a range of ports with the From and To fields Enable or disable the port with the State field The Zero IP field is used to allow ARP packets entrance to the Switch when these packets have an IP address of 0 0 0 0 regardless of whether or not the 0 0 0 0 IP address is set in the IP MAC Binding table When the Zero IP field is set to Disabled ARP packets containing the 0 0 0 0 IP address are dropped Click Apply to save changes To view this table click Administration gt IP MAC Binding gt IP MAC Binding Port 55 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual From O State ASS Foti w Poti Disabled Disabled Apply Pot Sate O eor l Disabled Disabled E Disabled Disabled Es Disabled Disabled 4 Disabled Disabled 5 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled d Disabled
61. find an entry enter the String or IP address and click Search to view all entries click ViewAll to delete an entry click Delete To add a new entry click Add the following window will appear for the user to configure String Max 255 characters server IP eg 10 90 90 90 Exact Match Figure 6 67 DHCP Relay Option 60 Settings window Add The following parameters may be configured Parameter Description Enter a string for the new entry up to a maximum of 255 characters Enter a Server IP address Match Type Use the drop down menu to choose Exact Match or Partial Match Click Apply to implement changes made To return to the DHCP Relay Option 60 Table click the Show DHCP Relay Option 60 Table link 82 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual DHCP Relay Option 61 Default Settings This window allows the user to set the default Server IP address This setting can be used to determine the rule to process the packets that have no option 61 matching rules The default is Drop To view this window click Administration gt DHCP BOOTP Relay gt DHCP Relay Option 61 Default Settings DHCP Relay Option 61 Default Figure 6 68 DHCP Relay Option 61 Default Settings window DHCP Relay Option 61 Settings This window allows the user to view the DHCP Relay Option 61 Table To v
62. from any SNMP based network management software In addition to the standard MIB II the Switch also supports its own proprietary enterprise MIB as an extended Management Information Base The proprietary MIB may also be retrieved by specifying the MIB Object Identifier MIB values can be either read only or read write 19 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual IP Address Assignment Each Switch must be assigned 1ts own IP Address which 1s used for communication with an SNMP network manager or other TCP IP application for example BOOTP TFTP The Switch s default IP address is 10 90 90 90 You can change the default Switch IP address to meet the specification of your networking address scheme The Switch is also assigned a unique MAC address by the factory This MAC address cannot be changed and can be found by entering the command show switch into the command line interface as shown below DES 3026 4 show switch Command show switch Device Type DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Module 1 Type None Module 2 Type None MAC Address 00 1C FO 11 69 59 IP Address 10 73 21 26 Manual VLAN Name default Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Boot PROM Version Build 1 01 009 Firmware Version Build 4 20 B27 Hardware Version A3 System Name System Location System Contact Spanning Tree Disabled LoopBack Detection Disabled IGMP Snooping Disabled
63. gt IP and MAC information for logging Log message Log message Informational successfully successfully uploaded uploaded by console Username lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt uploaded by console Username lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt by console and IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt are XOR shown in log string which means if user login by console will no IP and MAC information for logging Log message Log message upload by Warning by console and IP upload was console was lt ipaddr gt MAC unsuccessful unsuccessful lt macaddr gt are XOR Username shown in log string lt username gt IP which means if user lt ipaddr gt MAC login by console will no lt macaddr gt IP and MAC information for logging V 23 Interface Port link up Port lt unitID portNum gt Informational link state for ex link up lt link state gt 100Mbps FULL duplex 24 Port link down Port lt unitID portNum gt Informational link down 30 Console Successful login Unit lt unitlD gt Informational through Console Successful login through Console Username lt username gt MS There are no IP and MAC if login by console Login failed through Unit lt unitID gt Login Warning There are no IP and Console failed through Console MAC if login by console Username lt username gt Logout through Unit lt unitID gt Logout Informatio
64. header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN identifier of each packet header and use this as the full or partial criterion for forwarding 123 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual header Ethernet type Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the Ethernet type value in each frame s header Click Apply to set this entry in the Switch s memory The page shown below 1s the CPU IP Access Profile Configuration page ae z z or a E m q pu a er WLAN source IP Mask i k ar p _P type code type src port mask dest port mask flag mask bit urg ack psh rst syt fin UTP src port mask l dest port mask a ar a Frotecel ID user mask ALI Ep a z z E g HA gt E a ms Table Entries Figure 9 4 CPU Interface Filtering Configuration window IP Parameter Description Profile ID 1 3 Type in a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 1 3 Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IP address or Packet Content Mask This will change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header
65. in the Configuration folder To configure the Switch s IP address The web manager will display the Switch s current IP settings in the IP configuration menu as seen below To view this window click Administration gt IP Address Get IP From Manual Aires AG Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 O00 YLAWN Name default Ec Disabled v Description Figure 6 2 IP Address Settings window To manually assign the Switch s IP address subnet mask and default gateway address 1 Select Manual from the Get IP From drop down menu 2 Enter the appropriate IP Address and Subnet Mask 3 If you want to access the Switch from a different subnet from the one it is installed on enter the IP address of the Default Gateway If you will manage the Switch from the subnet on which it is installed you can leave the default address 0 0 0 0 in this field 4 If no VLANs have been previously configured on the Switch you can use the default VLAN Name The default VLAN contains all of the Switch ports as members If VLANs have been previously configured on the Switch you will need to enter the VLAN ID of the VLAN that contains the port connected to the management station that will access the Switch The Switch will allow management access from stations with the same VID listed here NOTE The Switch s factory default IP address is 10 90 90
66. limitations and exclusions may not apply This limited watranty provides specific legal rights and the product owner may also have other rights which vary from State to state Trademarks Copyright 2008 D Link Corporation Contents subject to change without prior notice D Link is a registered trademark of D Link Corporation D Link Systems Inc All other trademarks belong to their respective proprietors Copyright Statement No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative such as translation transformation or adaptation without permission from D Link Corporation D Link Systems Inc as stipulated by the United States Copyright Act of 1976 FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with this manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Lin Bui Iding Networks for Peo ple Subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein
67. on the Switch This information is sent to the server which then processes the information and then e mails Switch information to these recipients Up to 8 e mail recipients can be configured on the Switch using the SMTP Service Settings window by configuring the Mail Receiver Address field The administrator can configure the source mail address from which messages are delivered to configured recipients This can offer more information to the administrator about Switch functions and problems The personal e mail can be configured using the SMTP Service Settings window and setting the Self Mail Address field The Switch can be configured to send out test mail to first ensure that the recipient will receive e mails from the SMTP server regarding the Switch To configure this test mail the SMTP function must first be enabled by configuring the SMTP State in the SMTP Service Settings window and then by sending an email using the SMTP Service window All recipients configured for SMTP will receive a sample test message from the SMTP server ensuring the reliability of this function The Switch will send out e mail to recipients when one or more of the following events occur When a cold start occurs on the Switch When a port enters a link down status When a port enters a link up status When SNMP authentication has been denied by the Switch When a switch configuration entry has been saved to the NVRAM by the Switch When an abnormality occur
68. precautions for rack stability and safety Also refer to the rack installation documentation accompanying the system and the rack for specific caution statements and procedures e Systems are considered to be components in a rack Thus component refers to any system as well as to various peripherals or supporting hardware CAUTION Installing systems in a rack without the front and side stabilizers installed could cause the rack to tip over potentially resulting in bodily injury under certain circumstances Therefore always install the stabilizers before installing components in the rack After installing system components in a rack never pull more than one component out of the rack on its slide assemblies at one time The weight of more than one extended component could cause the rack to tip over and may result in serious injury e Before working on the rack make sure that the stabilizers are secured to the rack extended to the floor and that the full weight of the rack rests on the floor Install front and side stabilizers on a single rack or front stabilizers for joined multiple racks before working on the rack e Always load the rack from the bottom up and load the heaviest item in the rack first e Make sure that the rack is level and stable before extending a component from the rack e Use caution when pressing the component rail release latches and sliding a component into or out of a rack the slide rails can pinch your fin
69. purchase Warranty Period roduct including Power Supplies and Fans One 1 Year Spare parts and pare kits Ninety 90 days D Link s sole obligation shall be to repair or replace the defective Hardware at no charge to the original owner Such repair or replacement will be rendered by D Link at an Authorized D Link Service Office The replacement Hardware need not be new or of an identical make model or part D Link may in its discretion may replace the defective Hardware or any part thereof with any reconditioned product that D Link reasonably determines is substantially equivalent or superior in all material respects to the defective Hardware The Warranty Period shall extend for an additional ninety 90 days after any repaired or replaced Hardware is delivered If a material defect 1s incapable of correction or if D Link determines in its sole discretion that it is not practical to repair or replace the defective Hardware the price paid by the original purchaser for the defective Hardware will be refunded by D Link upon return to D Link of the defective Hardware All Hardware or part thereof that is replaced by D Link or for which the purchase price is refunded shall become the property of D Link upon replacement or refund Limited Software Warranty D Link warrants that the software portion of the product Software will substantially conform to D Link s then current functional specifications for the Software as set fort
70. relay servers are determined based on option 60 then the IPIF configured servers will be ignored Disabled If the relay server is not determined then the IPIF configured servers will be used to determine the relay servers DHCP Client identifier Allows the user to Enable or Disable the DHCP relay option 61 state on the Switch The option 61 State default is Disabled 78 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 State DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Check DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Policy Enabled When option 61 is enabled if the packets do not have option 61 then the relay servers cannot be determined based on option 61 If the relay servers are determined based on option 61 then the IPIF configured servers will be ignored Disabled If the relay server is not determined then the IPIF configured servers will be used to determine the relay servers This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu It is used to enable or disable the DHCP Agent Information Option 82 on the Switch The default is Disabled Enabled When this field is toggled to Enabled the relay agent will insert and remove DHCP relay information option 82 field in messages between DHCP servers and clients When the relay agent receives the DHCP request it adds the option 82 information and the IP addres
71. saved to flash Configuration saved to lt ipaddr gt MAC flash by console lt macaddr gt are XOR Username shown in log string lt username gt IP which means if user lt ipaddr gt MAC login by console there lt macaddr gt will no IP and MAC information for logging V 5 System log saved Unit lt unitID gt System Informational by console and IP to flash log saved to flash by lt ipaddr gt MAC console Username lt macaddr gt are XOR lt username gt IP shown in log string lt ipaddr gt MAC which means if user lt macaddr gt login by console there will no IP and MAC information for logging V Configuration and Unit lt unitlD gt Informational by console and IP log saved to flash Configuration and log lt ipaddr gt MAC saved to flash by lt macaddr gt are XOR console Username shown in log string lt username gt IP which means if user lt ipaddr gt MAC login by console there lt macaddr gt will no IP and MAC information for logging V 15 up down Firmware upgraded Unit lt unitID gt Firmware Informational by console and IP load successfully upgraded by console lt ipaddr gt MAC successfully lt macaddr gt are XOR Username shown in log string lt username gt IP which means if user lt ipaddr gt MAC login by console will no lt macaddr gt IP and MAC information for logging V 16 Firmware upgrade Unit lt unitID gt Firmware Warning by console and IP was unsuccessfu
72. select IGMP Snooping Configuration and other information concerning IGMP snooping may be found in Section 7 of this manual under IGMP Snooping 184 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Browse Router Port This displays the Switch s ports that are currently configured as router ports A router port configured by a user using the console or Web based management interface 1s displayed as a static router port designated by S A router port that is dynamically configured by the Switch is designated by D To view this table click Monitoring gt Browse Router Port YLAN Name default Ports 1 peie p popas x67 x8 9 2021 29 2a 24 25 26 Blest Figure 11 20 Browse Router Port window Browse ARP Table This window will show all current ARP entries on the Switch To clear the ARP Table click Clear All To view this table click Monitoring gt Browse ARP Table Interface Name IP Address MAC Address Y 10 0 0 0 FF FF FF FF FF FF LocalBroadcast 10 7 5 221 00 13 46 ED 3E 78 Local 1044 8 253 00 44 08 FD 09 09 Dynamic 1063677 00 09 41 De 15 0E Dynamic 10 73 21 1 D0 186 FC 02 46 05 Dynamic Mo FF FF FF FF FF FF LocallBroadcast Figure 11 21 Browse ARP Table window Session Table The Session Table allows the user to view detailed information about the current configuration session of the Switch Information such as the Session ID of the user initial Login Time
73. settings entered Only one VLAN may be assigned as the 802 1X Guest VLAN 152 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Initializing Ports for Port Based 802 1X Existing 802 1X port and MAC settings are displayed and can be configured using the window below To view the following window click Security gt 802 1X gt Initialize Port s ort Auth PAR State Eackend State Oper Dir PortStatus Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized 1 a 4 4 5 a 3 Figure 10 18 Initialize Port window This window allows you to initialize a port or group of ports The Initialize Port Table in the bottom half of the window displays the current status of the port s This window displays the following information Parameter Description Select ports to be initialized Pot A read only field indicating a port on the Switch MAC Address The MAC address of the Switch connected to the corresponding port if any Auth PAE State The Authenticator PAE State will display one of the following Initialize Disconnected Connecting Authenticating Authenticated Aborting Held ForceAuth or ForceUnauth Backend_State Th
74. station operation Spanning Tree Protocol STP A bridge based system for providing fault tolerance on networks STP works by allowing you to implement parallel paths for network traffic and ensure that redundant paths are disabled when the main paths are operational and enabled if the main paths fail stack A group of network devices that are integrated to form a single logical device standby port The port in a resilient link that will take over data transmission if the main port in the link fails switch A device which filters forwards and floods packets based on the packet s destination address The switch learns the addresses associated with each switch port and builds tables based on this information to be used for the switching decision TCP IP A layered set of communications protocols providing Telnet terminal emulation FTP file transfer and other services for communication among a wide range of computer equipment telnet A TCP IP application protocol that provides virtual terminal service letting a user log in to another computer system and access a host as if the user were connected directly to the host TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol Allows you to transfer files such as software upgrades from a remote device using your switch s local management capabilities UDP User Datagram Protocol An Internet standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another d
75. td ae aoe a a 18 A O AO 19 MID ei 19 Connecting Devices to Meloidae 21 Introduction to Web based Switch Configuration ccccccccssssssssssssccccssssssssssssscccccssssssssssscccsssscsssssscsoes DD aio UIC A O se satan shin IAN ES nate Lats abana AN T AE E O AN I nari Bootle iat AIT A A 22 LosSino omto the Web Mandot aeie E E A A A OS 22 Web based User Miterat naa aii 23 Areas Ol Me User MENICE aeaa a E A A N 23 We DE IOE A AP sees Peateute teem eee acaten Ore Ntees tetera anarsa neat cae tte earanae se vneseatioetnameehaaate ras aei ve aescaerensca eset aedenaeeec eae ees 23 IIA A y Device irnos cicle ric ada 2T FAU SS aa 28 settino the Switchs IP Address isis the Console Inter ACE A A A cose ase E 30 a AAA A O E ual ce eee aecta ns canoe tat 31 Y AA O O A O E dean EEEE E E O 31 a AM O OS 33 POCET A A A PR OP Po rn OO 34 ISP A A O O A II A 35 Canby aid User Py NC SC erst cc ete arte ve ac uta seca AAA A A A AAA AAA A AA A 36 Pass wW Ord ENCON riencia miii E iii 37 Cable DIOSES 1 A A 37 POROTOS a ii eel ico 38 A O A dadeeaaeenuacdunettocauaugaablesotcausenevadl ER 39 A A TI O 41 A ON 41 Time Zone an DS A A AI AA AAA IA AAA A EA 42 MAC NOU ATOR SEUA A A RA 44 TEL Sei WICC Scale 45 O A A 45 SNMP MNAn CD oa EE N E E EE E a O SNMP SEIE Saa A E E ET E ean E TO EES 46 SNMP SI paps a E E loreto 47 SNMP User Table e E 47 SNMP View ala co 49 SN MEOT ai o ito 50 INV Eomamuity Tabletas aos at ltda tcs la arena 52 SNMP
76. the VLAN for which to modify the IGMP Snooping Settings VLAN Name This is the VLAN Name that along with the VLAN ID identifies the VLAN for which to modify the IGMP Snooping Settings Query Interval The Query Interval field is used to set the time in seconds between transmitting IGMP 1 65535 queries Entries between 1 and 65535 seconds are allowed Default 125 Max Response Time This determines the maximum amount of time in seconds allowed before sending an IGMP response report The Max Response Time field allows an entry between 1 and 25 seconds Default 10 Robustness Value Adjust this variable according to expected packet loss If packet loss on the VLAN is 1 255 expected to be high the Robustness Variable should be increased to accommodate increased packet loss This entry field allows an entry of 1 to 255 Default 2 Last Member Query This field specifies the maximum amount of time between group specific query messages Interval 1 25 including those sent in response to leave group messages Default 1 Host Timeout This is the maximum amount of time in seconds allowed for a host to continue membership 1 16711450 in a multicast group without the Switch receiving a host membership report Default 260 Router Timeout This is the maximum amount of time in seconds a route is kept in the forwarding table 1 16711450 without receiving a membership report Default 260 Leave Timer This specifies the maximum
77. the time DST will end HH MM DST Annual Settings Using annual mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment Annual mode requires that the DST beginning and ending date be specified concisely For example specify to begin DST on April 3 and end DST on October 14 From What Month Enter the month DST will start on each year E rr To What Time Enter the time of day that DST will end on each year Click Apply to implement changes made to the Time Zone and DST window 43 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual MAC Notification Settings MAC Notification 1s used to monitor MAC addresses learned and entered into the forwarding database To globally set MAC notification on the Switch open the following window by clicking Administration gt MAC Notification Settings Global Settings The following parameters may be viewed and modified Parameter Description Enable or disable MAC notification globally on the Switch Interval The time in seconds between sec notifications History The maximum number of entries Disabled Disabled State Port State Size listed in the history log used for ma notification Up to 500 entries can Liselales be specified 3 Disabled 4 Disabled Port Settings 5 Disabled 6 Disabled To change MAC notification settings fora 7 is port or group of ports on the Switch o Disabled configure the follo
78. to encrypt and decrypt messages sent between the SSH client and the SSH server using the SSH Algorithm window 4 Finally enable SSH on the Switch using the SSH Configuration window After completing the preceding steps a SSH Client on a remote PC can be configured to manage the Switch using a secure in band connection 159 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual SSH Server Configuration The following window 1s used to configure and view settings for the SSH server and can be opened by clicking Security gt SSH gt SSH Server Configuration 25H Server Status Max Session Connection Timeout Auth Fail session Rekeying Listened Port Number SSH Server Status Disabled Y Max Session 1 8 8 Connection Timeout 120 600 120 Auth Fail 2 20 session Rekeying Figure 10 26 SSH Server Configuration and SSH Server Configuration Settings window To configure the SSH server on the Switch modify the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description SSH Server Status Use the pull down menu to enable or disable SSH on the Switch The default is Disabled Max Session 1 8 Enter a value between 1 and 8 to set the number of users that may simultaneously access the Switch The default setting is 8 Connection TimeOut Allows
79. type value may be set in the form hex Ox0 Oxffff which means the user may choose any combination of letters and numbers ranging from a f and from 0 9999 The Access Rule may be configured on a per port basis by entering the port number of the Switch into this field Entering all will denote all ports on the Switch To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule click 4 in the Access Rule Table to view the following screen Type Ethernet YLAN Name EG Show All CPU Intertace Filtermoa Eule Entries Figure 9 9 CPU Interface Filtering Rule Display Ethernet 128 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual The following window is the CPU Interface Filtering Rule Table for IP Rule Table AAA A Profile ID 2 1 Fermt IP Figure 9 10 CPU Interface Filtering Rule Table IP To create a new rule set for an access profile click the Add button A new window is displayed To remove a previously created rule click the corresponding button The following window is used for the IP Rule configuration Permt O Deny Access ID 1 i Type IF VLAN Name o source IP 0 0 0 0 Destination IP 0 0 0 0 DSCP 0 63 0 Show All CPU Interface Filtering Eule Entries Figure
80. types of data may be transmitted simultaneously It is intended to alleviate problems associated with the delivery of time critical data over congested networks The quality of applications that are dependent on such time critical data such as video conferencing can be severely and adversely affected by even very small delays in transmission Network devices that are in compliance with the IEEE 802 1p standard have the ability to recognize the priority level of data packets These devices can also assign a priority label or tag to packets Compliant devices can also strip priority tags from packets This priority tag determines the packet s degree of expeditiousness and determines the queue to which it will be assigned Priority tags are given values from O to 7 with O being assigned to the lowest priority data and 7 assigned to the highest The highest priority tag 7 is generally only used for data associated with video or audio applications which are sensitive to even slight delays or for data from specified end users whose data transmissions warrant special consideration The Switch allows you to further tailor how priority tagged data packets are handled on your network Using queues to manage priority tagged data allows you to specify its relative priority to suit the needs of your network There may be circumstances where it would be advantageous to group two or more differently tagged packets into the same queue Generally however it 1s recomme
81. will provide packet count samplings from the Switch s chip to determine if a Packet Storm is occurring Traffic Control implementations The possible time settings for this field are 0 5 30 minutes 5 is the default setting for this field and O will denote that the port will never shutdown Interval The Interval will set the time between Multicast and Broadcast packet counts sent from the Switch s chip to the Traffic Control function These packet counts are the determining factor in deciding when incoming packets exceed the Threshold value The Interval may be set between 5 and 30 seconds Count Down The Count Down timer is set to determine the amount of time in minutes that the Switch will wait before shutting down the port that is experiencing a traffic storm This parameter is only useful for ports configured as Shutdown in their Action field and therefore will not operate for Hardware based with the default setting of 5 seconds Click Apply to implement the settings of each field 135 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual NOTE Traffic Control cannot be implemented on ports that are set for Link Aggregation Port Trunking NOTE Ports that are in the Shutdown Forever mode will be seen as Discarding in Spanning Tree windows and implementations though these ports will still be forwarding BPDUs to the Switch s CPU NOTE Ports that are in Shutdown Forever mode will be see
82. 010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Recover Time Enter a time in seconds that a port will have to wait before being recovered from a Loopback Detection shutdown The user may set a time between 60 and 1000000 seconds with a default setting of 60 seconds The user may also enter a time of 0 which means that the port can only be recovered manually by the user This is done by going to the Port Configuration folder located in the Administration folder and manually enabling these ports using the Port Settings window Choose a port or group of ports that are to be enabled for the Loopback Detection function State Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the Loopback function for the selected ports Click Apply to implement changes made 108 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Cos Port Bandwidth 802 1p Default Priority 802 1p User Priority CoS Scheduling Mechanism CoS Output Scheduling Priority Settings TOS Priority Settings DSCP Priority Settings Port Mapping Priority Settings MAC Priority CoS The Switch supports 802 lp and other priority protocols The following section discusses the implementation 802 1p priority queuing and the Class of Service or CoS mapping on the Switch IEEE 802 1p Priority Priority tagging 1s a function defined by the IEEE 802 1p standard designed to provide a means of managing traffic on a network where many different
83. 100Mbps in full duplex mode only Copper gigabit ports may operate in 1000Mbps in full duplex only SFP gigabit ports operate in 1000Mbps in full duplex only Connections to the Gigabit Ethernet ports are made using a fiber optic cable or Category 5e copper cable depending on the type of port A valid connection is indicated when the Link LED is lit Backbone Switch or Router Optical Fiber Cable ee E ang 2 E E Da AAA a PET Eo O oa e pr Servers Printer Figure 3 4 Uplink Connection to a server PC or switch stack 14 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Introduction to Switch Management Management Options Web based Management Interface SNMP Based Management Managing User Accounts Command Line Console Interface through the Serial Port Connecting the Console Port RS 232 DCE First Time Connecting to the Switch Password Protection SNMP Settings IP Address Assignment Connecting Devices to the Switch Management Options This system may be managed out of band through the console port on the front panel or in band using Telnet The user may also choose the web based management accessible through a web browser Web based Management Interface After you have successfully installed the Switch you can configure the Switch monitor the LED panel and display statistics graphically using a web browser such as Netscape Navigator version 6
84. 114 Taiwan TEL 886 2 6600 0123 FAX 886 2 6600 1188 URL www dlink com tw Registration Card All Countries and Regions excluding USA Print type or use block letters Your name Mr Ms Organization Dept Y our title at organization Telephone Fax Organization s full address Country Date of purchase Month Day Year Product Model Product Serial No Product installed in type of computer Product installed in computer serial No Applies to adapters only Product was purchased from Reseller s name Telephone Fax Reseller s full address Answers to the following questions help us to support your product 1 Where and how will the product primarily be used OHome DOffice OU Travel OCompany Business DHome Business OPersonal Use 2 How many employees work at installation site 01 employee 02 9 0110 49 050 99 0100 499 0500 999 111000 or more 3 What network protocol s does your organization use OXNS IPX OTCP IP ODECnet OOthers 4 What network operating system s does your organization use OD Link LANsmart ONovell NetWare ONetWare Lite ASCO Unix Xenix OPC NFS O3Com 3 Open OBanyan Vines HWindows NT OWindows ME OWindows 2000 OWindows XP DOthers 5 What network management program does your organization use OD View OHP OpenView Windows OHP OpenView Unix OSunNet Manager ONovell NMS ONetView 6000 DOthers 6 What network medium media does your organization use OFiber optics OThick
85. 1s 10 01 O0 05 9D 73 32 F0 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 05 5D 66 6 7 A0 00 09 41 D5 15 0E 00 09 74 74 0E FC DO OC 6E 44 33 74 DO OC 6E 6E D4 P2 DO OE 46 B4 39 65 DO DE 46 BE FF 54 DO 0F 3D EC 69 4 4 00 13 46 ED 3E 25 00 15 65 61 40 00 00 15 F2 44 DD 64 O A el O O O ee O O ed O O ee ee ee Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic al Dynamic Dynamic e E O e AA E E E PE A E O e E e A e E ee default D0 17 31 4F 5E 57 Dinarme Total Entries 109 Figure 11 16 MAC Address Table The following fields can be viewed or set Parameter VLAN Name Enter a VLAN Name by which to browse the forwarding table MAC Address Enter a MAC address by which to browse the forwarding table Select the port by using the corresponding pull down menu Allows the user to move to a sector of the database corresponding to a user defined port VLAN or MAC address The VLAN ID of the VLAN of which the port is a member Description MAC Address The MAC address entered into the address table Pot The port to which the MAC address above corresponds Type Describes the method which the Switch discovered the MAC address The possible entries are Dynamic Self and Static Net Click this button to view the next page of the address table View All Entry Clicking this button will allow the user to view all entries of the address table 181
86. 2 1p User Priority User Priority Configuration Pino E T Priority ESE Priorty3 E Priority 5 GA Pins _ _ GS Priority 7 EA Figure 8 4 802 1p User Priority window Class 2 Y Once you have assigned a priority to the port groups on the Switch you can then assign this Class to each of the four levels of 802 1p priorities Click Apply to set your changes CoS Scheduling Mechanism This drop down menu allows you to select between a Weight Fair and a Strict mechanism for emptying the priority classes To view this window click CoS gt CoS Scheduling Mechanism 203 scheduling Mechanism Scheduling Mechanism CoS Scheduling Mechanism Table Class Weight fair lass 1 Weight far Llass 2 Weight fair lass 4 Strict Figure 8 5 CoS Scheduling Mechanism and CoS Scheduling Mechanism Table window NOTICE The default CoS scheduling arrangement is a strict priority schedule for the ie highest class Class 3 which means the Switch will consider the highest class of service to have strict scheduling only while the other queues empty in a round robin method The Scheduling Mechanism has the following parameters Parameter Description Strict Denoting a Strict scheduling will set the highest queue to be emptied first while the other 115 DES 3010F DES 3010FL
87. 2 Policy 79 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual The Implementation of DHCP Information Option 82 on the Switch The config dhcp_relay option_82 command configures the DHCP relay agent information option 82 setting of the switch The formats for the circuit ID sub option and the remote ID sub option are as follows NOTE For the circuit ID sub option of a standalone switch the module field is always zero Circuit ID sub option format L Ze 3 4 gt 6 L pt 6 O0 4 VLAN Module Port l byte lbyte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes l byte 1 byte a Sub option type b Length c Circuit ID type d Length e VLAN the incoming VLAN ID of DHCP client packet f Module For a standalone switch the Module is always 0 For a stackable switch the Module is the Unit ID g Port The incoming port number of DHCP client packet port number starts from 1 Remote ID sub option format l 2 3 4 5 2 8 0 6 MACaddress _____ l byte Ibyte 1byte 1 byte 6 bytes 1 Sub option type 2 Length 3 Remote ID type 4 Length 5 MAC address The Switch s system MAC address Figure 6 63 Circuit ID and Remote ID Sub option Format DHCP BOOTP Relay Interface Settings This window allows the user to set up a server by IP address for relaying DHCP BOOTP information to the Switch The user may enter a previously configured IP interface on the Switch that will be connected direc
88. 2 and higher or Microsoft Internet Explorer version 5 0 SNMP Based Management You can manage the Switch with an SNMP compatible console program The Switch supports SNMP version 1 0 version 2 0c and version 3 0 The SNMP agent decodes the incoming SNMP messages and responds to requests with MIB objects stored in the database The SNMP agent updates the MIB objects to generate statistics and counters Command Line Console Interface through the Serial Port You can also connect a computer or terminal to the serial console port to access the Switch The command line driven interface provides complete access to all Switch management features Connecting the Console Port RS 232 DCE The Switch provides an RS 232 serial port that enables a connection to a computer or terminal for monitoring and configuring the Switch This port is a female DB 9 connector implemented as a data terminal equipment DTE connection To use the console port you need the following equipment A terminal or a computer with both a serial port and the ability to emulate a terminal A null modem or crossover RS 232 cable with a female DB 9 connector for the console port on the Switch 15 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual To connect a terminal to the console port ls D eae 10 11 12 13 Connect the female connector of the RS 232 cable directly to the console port on the Switch
89. 26 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual SECTION 2 Installation Package Contents Before You Connect to the Network Installing the Switch without the Rack Rack Installation Power On The Optional Module Redundant Power System Package Contents Open the shipping carton of the Switch and carefully unpack its contents The carton should contain the following items One DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 or DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Mounting kit two brackets and screws Four rubber feet with adhesive backing One AC power cord RS 232 console cable One CD Kit for User s Guide CLI D View module SNMP module This Manual with Registration Card If any item is missing or damaged please contact your local D Link Reseller for replacement Before You Connect to the Network The site where you install the Switch may greatly affect 1ts performance Please follow these guidelines for setting up the Switch Install the Switch on a sturdy level surface that can support the weight of the Switch Do not place heavy objects on the Switch The power outlet should be within 1 82 meters 6 feet of the Switch Visually inspect the power cord and see that it is fully secured to the AC power port Make sure that there is proper heat dissipation from and adequate ventilation around the Switch Leave at least 10 cm 4 inches of space at the front and rear of the Switch for ventilation Install the Switch in a fairly coo
90. 6 25 1 26 26 1 26 Figure 10 24 Current Traffic Segmentation Table 158 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Click on the Setup button to open the Setup Forwarding ports page as shown below View Settings of All Ports Figure 10 25 Setup Forwarding Ports window This page allows you to determine which port on a given switch in a switch stack will be allowed to forward packets to other ports on that switch Configuring traffic segmentation on the Switch is accomplished in two parts First you specify a port from that switch using the Port pull down menu Then specify the different ports that you want to be able to receive packets from the port you specified in the first part Clicking the Apply button will enter the combination of transmitting port and allowed receiving ports into the Switch s Traffic Segmentation table The Port drop down menu allows you to select a port from that switch This is the port that will be transmitting packets The Forward Port click boxes allow you to select which of the ports on the selected switch will be able to forward packets These ports will be allowed to receive packets from the port specified above Click Apply to enter the settings into the Switch s Traffic Segmentation table Clicking the Apply button will enter the combination of transmitting port and allowed receiving ports into the Switch s Traffic Segmentation
91. ADIUS Authentication window 66 g The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics between s and 60s where stands for seconds The default value is one second To clear the current statistics shown click the er button in the top left hand corner The following fields can be viewed Parameter Description The identification number assigned to each RADIUS Authentication server that the client shares a secret with 186 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual UDP Port The UDP port the client is using to send requests to this server Timeouts The number of authentication timeouts to this server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout Requests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to this server This does not include retransmissions Challenges The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets valid or invalid received from this server The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from this server AccessRejects The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets valid or invalid received from this server RoundTripTime The time interval in hundredths of a second between the most recent Access Reply Access Chall
92. ASE T hub or switch can be connected to the Switch via a twisted pair Category 3 4 or 5 UTP STP cable A 100BASE TX hub or switch can be connected to the Switch via a twisted pair Category 5 UTP STP cable A 1000BASE T switch can be connected to the Switch via a twisted pair Category 5e UTP STP cable A switch supporting a fiber optic uplink can be connected to the Switch s SFP ports via fiber optic cabling DES 3018 MARDAN DES 3018 10 100 Fast Ethernet Switch DES 3010F 10 100 Fast Ethernet Switch Link A cia a _ W V Optical Fiber Cable DES 3010F 8 peed En 7 y A ALA OOO aa Figure 3 3 Switch connected to switch using fiber optic cabling 13 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual DES 3010F FL G DES 3016 DES 3018 or DES 3026 as a Network Backbone The Switch can be employed as a network backbone for offices or buildings that require many Ethernet connections within a confined space Once a high speed line has been connected from the ISP the Switch can farm out connections for various end nodes including PCs printers hubs routers or other switches The topology configurations are endless but be sure that connections coming from the Switch are at a equal or slower speed than the ISP uplink to avoid bottlenecking The copper ports operate at a speed of 100Mbps or 10Mbps in full or half duplex mode The 1I00BASE FX ports can operate at
93. All two protocols calculate a stable topology in the same way Every segment will have a single path to the root bridge All bridges listen for BPDU packets However BPDU packets are sent more frequently with every Hello packet BPDU packets are sent even if a BPDU packet was not received Therefore each link between bridges is sensitive to the status of the link Ultimately this difference results in faster detection of failed links and thus faster topology adjustment A drawback of 802 1D is this absence of immediate feedback from adjacent bridges 802 1wRSTP 802 1D STP Table 6 1 Comparing Port States RSTP is capable of a more rapid transition to a forwarding state it no longer relies on timer configurations RSTP compliant bridges are sensitive to feedback from other RSTP compliant bridge links Ports do not need to wait for the topology to stabilize before transitioning to a forwarding state In order to allow this rapid transition the protocol introduces two new variables the edge port and the point to point P2P port 101 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Edge Port The edge port is a configurable designation used for a port that is directly connected to a segment where a loop cannot be created An example would be a port connected directly to a single workstation Ports that are designated as edge ports transition to a forwarding state immediately without going through t
94. CP compliant devices to negotiate the aggregated link so the group may be changed dynamically as needs require In order to utilize the ability to change an aggregated port group that is to add or subtract ports from the group at least one of the participating devices must designate LACP ports as active Both devices must support LACP Passive LACP ports that are designated as passive cannot initially send LACP control frames In order to allow the linked port group to negotiate adjustments and make changes dynamically one end of the connection must have active LACP ports see above Click Apply to implement changes made 96 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual IGMP Snooping Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP snooping allows the Switch to recognize IGMP queries and reports sent between network stations or devices and an IGMP host When IGMP snooping is enabled the Switch can open or close a port to a specific device based on IGMP messages passing through the Switch In order to use IGMP Snooping it must first be enabled for the entire Switch see Advanced Settings You may then fine tune the settings for each VLAN using the IGMP Snooping link in the L2 Features folder When enabled for IGMP snooping the Switch can open or close a port to a specific Multicast group member based on IGMP messages sent from the device to the IGMP host or vice versa The Switch monitors IGMP messag
95. CP to use the TCP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Selecting TCP requires that you specify a source port mask and or a destination port mask The user may also identify which flag bits to filter Flag bits are parts of a packet that determine what to do with the packet The user may filter packets by filtering certain flag bits within the packets by checking the boxes corresponding to the flag bits of the TCP field The user may choose between urg urgent ack acknowledgement psh push rst reset syn synchronize fin finish src port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the source port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff which you wish to filter dest port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the destination port in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff which you wish to filter Select UDP to use the UDP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Selecting UDP requires that you specify a source port mask and or a destination port mask src port mask Specify a UDP port mask for the source port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff dest port mask Specify a UDP port mask for the destination port in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff Protocol ID Enter a value defining the protocol ID in the packet header to mask Specify the protocol ID mask in hex form hex Ox0O Oxffffffff Click Apply to set this entry in the Switch s memory 125 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES
96. Commander Switch to the Member Switch Member Switches will be listed in the table and will be specified by Port port on the CS where the MS resides MAC Address Model Name and Version To specify a certain Switch for firmware download click 1ts corresponding check box under the Port heading To update the firmware enter the Server IP Address where the firmware resides and enter the Path Filename of the firmware Click Download to initiate the file transfer To access the following window click Administration gt Single IP Setting gt Firmware Upgrade mo Port MAC Address Model Name server IP Address D o 0 _ _ Figure 6 53 Firmware Upgrade window Configuration File Backup Restore This screen is used to upgrade configuration files from the Commander Switch to the Member Switch using a TFTP server Member Switches will be listed in the table and will be specified by Port port on the CS where the MS resides MAC Address Model Name and Version To specify a certain Switch for upgrading configuration files click its corresponding radio button under the Port heading To update the configuration file enter the Server IP Address where the file resides and enter the Path Filename of the configuration file Click Download to initiate the file transfer from a TFTP server to the Switch Click Upload to backup the configuration file to a TFIP server To access the following window click Administrati
97. D Link Systems Inc D Link provides this Limited Warranty Only to the person or entity that originally purchased the product from D Link or its authorized reseller or distributor and Only for products purchased and delivered within the fifty states of the United States the District of Columbia U S Possessions or Protectorates U S Military Installations or addresses with an APO or FPO Limited Warranty D Link warrants that the hardware portion of the D Link product described below Hardware will be free from material defects in workmanship and materials under normal use from the date of original retail purchase of the product for the period set forth below Warranty Period except as otherwise stated herein Limited Lifetime Warranty for the product is defined as follows e Hardware For as long as the original customer end user owns the product or five 5 years after product discontinuance whichever occurs first excluding power supplies and fans e Power supplies and fans Three 3 Year Spare parts and spare kits Ninety 90 days The customer s sole and exclusive remedy and the entire liability of D Link and its suppliers under this Limited Warranty will be at D Link s option to repair or replace the defective Hardware during the Warranty Period at no charge to the original owner or to refund the actual purchase price paid Any repair or replacement will be rendered by D Link at an Authorized D Link
98. DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual queues will follow the weighted round robin scheduling scheme Use the weighted round robin WAR algorithm to handle packets in an even distribution in priority classes of service Click Apply to let your changes take effect CoS Output Scheduling CoS can be customized by changing the output scheduling used for the hardware classes of service in the Switch As with any changes to CoS implementation careful consideration should be given to how network traffic in lower priority classes of service is affected Changes in scheduling may result in unacceptable levels of packet loss or significant transmission delay If you choose to customize this setting 1t 1s important to monitor network performance especially during peak demand as bottlenecks can quickly develop if the CoS settings are not suitable To view this window click CoS gt CoS Output Scheduling CoS Output Scheduling Cso Weight OOO O O asso Cassa Figure 8 6 CoS Output Scheduling Configuration window You may assign the following values to the CoS classes to set the scheduling Parameter Description Specifies the maximum number of packets the above specified hardware priority class of service will be allowed to transmit before allowing the next lowest priority queue to transmit its pack
99. DODOOOOOOOOOO AN 0 0000000000000000000000000 x 00000000000000000000000000 Both 00000000000000000000000000 Note The Source Port and Target Port should be diferent or the setup wil be invalid Wote 2 The far Figure 6 12 Port Mirroring window To configure a mirror port Select the Source Port from where you want to copy frames and the Target Port which receives the copies from the source port Select the Source Direction Ingress Egress or Both and change the Status drop down menu to Enabled Click Apply to let the changes take effect NOTE You cannot mirror a fast port onto a slower port For example if you try to mirror the traffic from a 100 Mbps port onto a 10 Mbps port this can cause throughput problems The port you are copying frames from should always support an equal or lower speed than the port to which you are sending the copies Also the target port for the mirroring cannot be a member of a trunk group Please note a target port and a source port cannot be the same port 38 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual System Log Settings The Switch can send Syslog messages to up to four designated servers using the Current System Log Host window Click Administration gt System Log Settings to view the screen shown below Current System Log Host 1 10 143 warning Local 514 Disabled x Figur
100. Duplex The user may configure these ports to be Auto or 1000M Full Flow Control Displays the flow control scheme used for the various port configurations Ports configured for full duplex use 802 3x flow control half duplex ports use backpressure flow control and Auto ports use an automatic selection of the two The default is Disabled Click Apply to implement the new settings on the Switch 32 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Port Description The Switch supports a port description feature where the user may name various ports on the Switch To assign names to various ports click Administration gt Port Configuration gt Port Description the following window will be displayed Use the From and To pull down menu to choose a port or range of ports to describe and then enter a description of the port s Click Apply to set the descriptions in the Port Description Table Poti vw Foti mT we E E A E O RO H 5 l ea Figure 6 4 Port Description Setting and Port Description Table To remove a description for a port select the port leave the description field empty and click Apply 33 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Port Error Disabled The following window 1s used to view information about ports that have had their connection status disabled due to the detection of some storm control anomaly
101. ES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Property Device Nare kdefauit 05 05 00 Module Mame DGS 33248R La Switch Wac Address 00 06 01 05 05 00 Remote Port Ho J Local Port Mao 24 Port Speed OO F ull Close ieee Applet Window Figure 6 49 Device Property window This window holds the following information Parameter Description Device Name This field will display the Device Name of the switches in the SIM group configured by the user If no Device Name is configured by the name it will be given the name default and tagged with the last six digits of the MAC Address to identify it Module Name Displays the full module name of the switch that was right clicked MAC Address Displays the MAC Address of the corresponding Switch Remote Port No Displays the number of the physical port on the MS or CaS that the CS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field Local Port No Displays the number of the physical port on the CS that the MS or CaS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field Port Speed Displays the connection speed between the CS and the MS or CaS Click Close to close the Property window Menu Bar The Single IP Management window contains a menu bar for device configurations as seen below File Group Device View Help Figure 6 50 Menu Bar of the Topology View The five menus on the menu bar are as follows File Print Setup will view the image to be
102. ES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Logout The following window is used to logout of the Switch Clicking the Logout button will return the user to the main login page Are you sure you want logout If yes just click the Logout button and return to main page Figure 11 33 Reboot System window 199 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Appendix A Physical and Environmental AC input DES 3010F FL 110 220 VAC 0 234A 0 145A 60 50 Hz DES 3010G 110 220 VAC 0 231A 0 138A 60 50 Hz DES 3016 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz DES 3018 110 220 VAC 0 249A 0 153A 60 50 Hz DES 3026 110 220 VAC 0 276A 0 173A 60 50 Hz Power Consumption DES 3010FL 14 8W DES 3010F 15W DES 3010G 14 8W DES 3016 11W DES 3018 15 2W DES 3026 17W Storage Temperature Operating Temperature O to 40 degrees Celsius 40 to 70 degrees Celsius Humidity Operating 5 to 95 RH non condensing Storage 0 to 95 RH non condensing Dimensions DES 3010F FL 280 mm x 180 mm x 44 mm 1U 11 inch rack mount width DES 3016 DES 3018 3026 441 mm x 207mm x 44 mm 1U 19 inch rack mount width Weight DES 3010F FL G 1 5kg DES 3016 2 2kg DES 3018 and DES 3026 2 1 kg EMI FCC Class A CE Class A C Tick Class A VCCI Class A Safety CSA International 200 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026
103. Enable or Disable the VLAN trunk global settings on the Switch If enabled the VLAN trunk ports shall be ale to forward all tagged frames with any VID Enter the port or range of ports you wish to configure for VLAN trunk port settings Use the pull down menu to Enable or Disable the VLAN trunk settings for a port or range of ports on the Switch 93 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Link Aggregation To configure a port trunking group or view the current trunking group entries click L2 Features gt Trunking gt Link Aggregation Add New Trunking Group 1 2 Disabled X Figure 7 9 Port Trunking Group window To configure port trunk groups click the Add button to add a new trunk group and use the Port Trunking Configuration menu see example below to set up trunk groups To modify a port trunk group click the hyperlinked group number corresponding to the entry you wish to alter To delete a port trunk group click the corresponding under the Delete heading in the Current Trunking Group Entries table Ea Disabled Type AET ajg DE IE i po I lt er Port p mk tA fae T o 3 lt BHEHBHBHE BRR BRR BRR RR Ree eee E E E E E E y g 3 zi el fa Hui bp 5 Hj 4 ul ha ha Dl E E E PP E EI Lua pr EI El LA E El E J pp El El ha hua re E Li EJ Lad kt En E
104. F ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY CANNOT BE DISCLAIMED IN ANY TERRITORY WHERE A PRODUCT IS SOLD THE DURATION OF SUCH IMPLIED WARRANTY SHALL BE LIMITED TO NINETY 90 DAYS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY COVERED UNDER THE LIMITED WARRANTY PROVIDED HEREIN THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY SELECTION AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT IS WITH THE PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT Limitation of Liability TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW D LINK IS NOT LIABLE UNDER ANY CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY FOR ANY LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT INCONVENIENCE OR DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER WHETHER DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL WORK STOPPAGE COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION LOSS OF INFORMATION OR DATA CONTAINED IN STORED ON OR INTEGRATED WITH ANY PRODUCT RETURNED TO D LINK FOR WARRANTY SERVICE RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THE PRODUCT RELATING TO WARRANTY SERVICE OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY EVEN IF D LINK HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THE SOLE REMEDY FOR A BREACH OF THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY IS REPAIR REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE DEFECTIVE OR NON CONFORMING PRODUCT GOVERNING LAW This Limited Warranty shall be governed by the laws of the state of California Some states do not allow exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts so the foregoing
105. Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Monitoring CPU Utilization Port Utilization Packets Packet Errors Packet Size VLAN Status MAC Address Switch Log Log Settings IGMP Snooping Group Browse Router Port Browse ARP Table Session Table Port Access Control CPU Utilization The CPU Utilization displays the percentage of the CPU being used expressed as an integer percentage and calculated as a simple average by time interval To view this window click Monitoring gt CPU Utilization One Min F pu z ul i ns Time Interval ls Record Number 200 ShowHide le Five Secs W One hin W Five Mins Figure 11 1 CPU Utilization graph 165 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual To view the CPU utilization by port use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port Click Apply to implement the configured settings Click Clear to automatically refresh with new updated statistics The information is described as follows Parameter Description Time Interval 7s Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second ecord Number 200 Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Show Hide Check whether or not to display CPU utilization for five seconds one minute or five minutes Port Utilization The Port Utilization page di
106. Figure 6 7 User Account Modify Table Add Add a new user by typing in a User Name and New Password and retype the same password in the Confirm New Password Choose the level of privilege Admin or User from the Access Right drop down menu To return to the User Account window click the hyperlinked Show All User Account Entries Confirm New Password l ww O access Rik Show All User Account Entries Figure 6 8 User Account Modify Table Modify or delete an existing user account in the User Account Modify Table To delete the user account click on the Delete button To change the password type in the New Password and retype it in the Confirm New Password entry field The user can choose the level of encryption for their new account by selecting Default plain_text or SHA 1 The level of privilege Admin or User can be viewed in the Access Right field To return to the User Account window click the hyperlinked Show All User Account Entries 35 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Admin and User Privileges There are two levels of user privileges Admin and User Some menu selections available to users with Admin privileges may not be available to those with User privileges The following table summarizes the Admin and User privileges Management Admin User Read Only
107. G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Egress bandwidth assigned from radius server after radius client authenticated by radius server successfully This egress bandwidth will assign to the port 802 1p default priority assigned from radius server after radius client authenticated by radius server successfully This 802 1p default priority will assign to the port 802 1X Authentication failure 802 1X Authentication success Informational Radius server lt ipaddr gt assigned egress bandwidth lt egressBandwidth gt to port lt unitID portNum gt account lt username gt Radius server lt ipaddr gt Informational assigned 802 1p deafult priority lt priority gt to port lt unitID portNum gt account lt username gt 802 1X Authentication failure for lt reason gt from Username lt username gt Port lt unitlD portNum gt MAC lt macaddr gt Warning 802 1X Authentication success for lt reason gt from Username lt username gt Port lt unitlD portNum gt MAC lt macaddr gt Informational 208 This log will be generated when 802 1X authentication is successful and egress bandwidth is assigned from the RADIUS server This log will be generated when 802 1X authentication is successful and the 802 1p default priority is assigned from the RADIUS server This log will be generated when 802 1X authentication has finished
108. Host Table it A AA A A AA AA A AA AAA AAA A ti 53 SNMP Engine ID sra AAA AA AAA A Ad 54 IMAC Port Bindi IMP ES instales dor cias lolicon didas 55 IP MAC Port indians IIED EAS 55 IPEMAC Bd Tablice A A A E N E acai casttoen dacaceean 56 1M Seth Beas Oa OWL AYO NT iti 01 dad o A 58 D Link Sinsle TP Manas ement foc saicst ces A A A A EN 59 Siniele 1P Manacement SIM OV fV OW onene aie DAS A DANA ESSE A Genie sitcbecaledeninenss 59 SIM sins the Web Interact aran AAA A A A E EA AA A AIN IR 60 LOPOLO admita ra aid di dnd da aaa 61 EN AA anne Ont ee er erent nen oe nC R ON Reenter reno ery er ents ou emer en 63 AN A O 65 GTO COAST SAS AEREA TAREAS IAEA IA AT 65 Commander wie CONN A AAA SA AA EE 65 Member Swiss td dt ida 66 Bes rl CONN AMA A A E T O 67 DY SUE ao ha IAE LSO Aun nn O A O 68 O O O REN 69 a e a a a e eS 69 A E A A A E P A E E T E A E E E A SA E A E E E E T E T A E E E E T Seas Seabees tac one 69 P he OTE i E E N 70 Conn suravon Fle Bakun Restore raserna ar bb T E RA 70 UPKA EOS E a O 70 Forwarding Ae RUSA aa 72 Unicast Forward MO ex ccpascck eased SAA ARANA AAA AAA A AS 72 Multicast Forward INE ty AD AD AA SANA A A a 73 Multicast Falter Mode aura a ALAS AA AAA SAI TA A A Aa 74 MTS dida 75 SNIE SCREEN iio 76 SMTP SEUS ati A id tentacle I4 DHCP BOOTP R laS eessen N N talas 78 DHCP BOOTP Relay Global Scans A ST E E E o adenine 78 The Implementation of DHCP Information Option 82 on the SwitcCkh cccccccccccn
109. Level settings only apply to SNMPv3 NoAuthNoPriv Specifies that there will be no authorization and no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager AuthNoPriv Specifies that authorization will be required but there will be no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager AuthPriv Specifies that authorization will be required and that packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manger will be encrypted To implement your new settings click Apply To return to the SNMP Group Table click the Show All SNMP Group Table Entries link 51 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual SNMP Community Table Use this table to create an SNMP community string to define the relationship between the SNMP manager and an agent The community string acts like a password to permit access to the agent on the Switch One or more of the following characteristics can be associated with the community string An Access List of IP addresses of SNMP managers that are permitted to use the community string to gain access to the Switch s SNMP agent Any MIB view that defines the subset of all MIB objects will be accessible to the SNMP community Read write or read only level permission for the MIB objects accessible to the SNMP community To configure SNMP Community entries click Administration gt SNMP Manager gt SNMP Community Table
110. Live Time configuration connection From the Switch Level and Name of the user are displayed Click Reload to refresh this screen To view this table click Monitoring gt Session Table 185 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Ferca Total Entries 1 irrent Session Table om Time Live Time From Level Name 00000 days 00 44 00 00 45 21 560 SerialPort 1 Anonymous Figure 11 22 Current Session Table Port Access Control The following screens are used to monitor 802 1X statistics of the Switch on a per port basis To view the Port Access Control screens open the Monitoring folder and click the Port Access Control folder There are six screens to monitor NOTE The Authenticator State Authenticator Statistics Authenticator Session Statistics and Authenticator Diagnostics windows in this section cannot be viewed on the Switch unless 802 1X is enabled by port or by MAC address To enable 802 1X go to the Switch 802 1X entry in the DES 3026 Web Management Tool RADIUS Authentication This table contains information concerning the activity of the RADIUS authentication client on the client side of the RADIUS authentication protocol It has one row for each RADIUS authentication server that the client shares a secret with To view the RADIUS Authentication click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt RADIUS Authentication Clear Radius Authentication Figure 11 23 R
111. MAC Binding Blocked Table click Delete All 58 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual D Link Single IP Management Single IP Management SIM Overview Simply put D Link Single IP Management is a concept that will stack switches together over Ethernet instead of using stacking ports or modules There are some advantages in implementing the Single IP Management feature 1 SIM can simplify management of small workgroups or wiring closets while scaling the network to handle increased bandwidth demand 2 SIM can reduce the number of IP address needed in your network 3 SIM can eliminate any specialized cables for stacking connectivity and remove the distance barriers that typically limit your topology options when using other stacking technology Switches using D Link Single IP Management labeled here as SIM must conform to the following rules SIM is an optional feature on the Switch and can easily be enabled or disabled through the Command Line Interface or Web Interface SIM grouping has no effect on the normal operation of the Switch in the user s network There are three classifications for SIM The Commander Switch CS which is the master switch of the group Member Switch MS which is a switch that is recognized by the CS a member of a SIM group and a Candidate Switch CaS which is a Switch that has a physical link to the SIM group but has not been recognized by the CS a
112. Network Monitoring IGMP Snooping Status Introduction All software functions of the DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 switch can be managed configured and monitored via the embedded web based HTML interface The Switch can be managed from remote stations anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Netscape Navigator Communicator Mozilla or Microsoft Internet Explorer The browser acts as a universal access tool and can communicate directly with the Switch using the HTTP protocol The Web based management module and the Console program and Telnet are different ways to access the same internal switching software and configure it Thus all settings encountered in web based management are the same as those found in the console program Logging on to the Web Manager To begin managing the Switch simply run the browser you have installed on your computer and enter the IP address you have defined for the device The URL in the address bar should read something like http 123 123 123 123 where the numbers 123 represent the IP address of the Switch NOTE The Factory default IP address for the Switch is 10 90 90 90 Once the IP address has been entered the management module s user authentication window will be presented as seen below 22 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual User name Password Remember my password Figure 5 1 Ent
113. O 165 POC CIN Z AU O lt A A RA A A A AR 166 PAC Tal O O E ORO O esau OE castors oan rime OE TOE ae onwete 168 Receo RA tds dr A LAR AA A AAA IA AAA Wass AEE EETA 168 UMB C aS ARA aia t oa 170 Trans mte EA harna ence teh naan a a a aa AS 172 AS ECE O II O II we et cung eta A 174 A A E A RR 174 DAIS MUGS o dd TA AMA Mn E sts llc ws eal capa ieee Bla ts NEETA E E seal aicetoa EA NG 176 ACRE SAS AAA AAA ee DANE Outils 178 NCAN an OA ace eset gt rc ee a ec est nc ca A 180 MACIAS aa caca ada aia 181 SA A A A ee outa 182 A SR 183 IGMP SAO OPI STOP SI AA A AA A AA EA AA AEREA A ASAS AA EEN taalirccins Sites 184 DITO Se Fe OU POR us ida it att at iia 185 BTW SS ARP TAS a A AA A AA TES 185 A E A T 185 rn E 111 10 AA II IN A A A A re nT Ten 186 RADIUS AUD M1 CAC O08 AAA AAA AA ASA AAA ASS ita 186 RADIUS ACCOU MING A AA A AA AA 188 Auth is AAA A A E A A A RI oles Mites Sud dlewceatten 189 AVH SESSIONS ISHO A AAA A AA AAA AAA AAA AAA 191 TU TAO E AI E ARA A A AAA AA EA os 192 AVS a5 sees estrada strc A ETO doula haa aig Ose Sa ET La ul cis cts Beale ca et nes sa Ly eute Sa oes da ued Sa adap adele Saad E 195 S ene E Se ET ee nen IRR E NT en eI era ee ee ee 197 RED O O 198 Save C NIDS tada 198 PPD CTR A vereni E A E E O oecenaeeadusanedseeuacsoseevenvene 200 APPENA Bororo E E A 203 Cobran OPN O a a alado ooo esa nf 203 POTOSI IN C eosa A N 204 Dy Stet LOS ENU ICS A A A A ia 204 A tecesai cca bavcedecewanceusesucensdoecotecscavceussecadceusaduceu
114. Port Mapping Priority Settings menu to configure priority mapping for Class of Service on the Switch Port Mapping Priority CoS can only be used 1f 1t has been previously configured for the selected ports in the Priority Setting menu There are two Class of Service levels available To view this table click CoS gt Port Mapping Priority Settings Poti S Potni Po i OOOO 1 J E 0 E i 4 0 5 1 0 E 1 E 0 a J 0 i 0 1 0 g 0 1 0 g 0 i 0 i 0 i 0 Figure 8 10 Port Mapping Priority CoS Use the From To menu to select the ports being configured the selected ports must first be configured for port based priority in the Priority Setting menu Select the Class level for the port s there are two levels 3 for high priority and O for low priority 120 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual MAC Priority Settings When using the MAC Priority mechanism the packet 1s classified based on the MAC address field priority in the MAC priority table entries To configure a destination MAC address for a CoS queue users must adhere to the following steps 1 Users must first enter a static destination MAC address into the Forwarding Database FDB of the switch To accomplish this go to the Unicast Forwarding table in the Forwarding Filtering folder under the Configuration menu and click on the Unicast Forwarding link which will display a window for users to enter t
115. R ER 36 S KER Dy FUL BE Q6F 02 0525 His ain 100013 AEE HITE 010 58257789 ZE TULA 010 58257790 tit http www dlink com cn APA HS Al Jel 2 el ti 509 00 1 H 18 00 D Link Building Networks for People International Offices U S A 17595 Mt Herrmann Street Fountain Valley CA 92708 TEL 1 800 326 1688 URL www dlink com Canada 2180 Winston Park Drive Oakville Ontario L6H 5W1 Canada TEL 1 905 8295033 FAX 1 905 8295223 URL www dlink ca Europe U K D Link Europe Ltd D Link House Abbey Road Park Royal London NW10 7BX United Kingdom TEL 44 0 20 8955 9000 FAX 44 0 20 8955 9001 URL www dlink co uk Austria Millennium Tower Handelskai 94 96 A 1200 WIEN Austria TEL 43 0 1 240 27 270 FAX 43 0 1 240 27 271 URL www dlink at Belgium Rue des Colonies 11 B 1000 Brussels Belgium TEL 32 0 2 517 7111 FAX 32 0 2 517 6500 URL www dlink be Bulgaria 60A Bulgaria Blvd Office 1 Sofia 1680 Bulgaria TEL 359 2 958 22 42 FAX 359 2 958 65 57 URL www dlink eu Czech Republic Vaclavske namesti 36 110 00 Praha 1 Czech Republic TEL 420 224 247 500 FAX 420 224 234 967 Hot line CZ 420 225 281 553 Hot line SK 421 263 813 628 URL www dlink cz URL www dlink sk Denmark Naverland 2 DK 2600 Glostrup Copenhagen Denmark TEL 45 43 96 9 040 FAX 45 43 42 43 47 URL www dlink dk Finland Latokartanontie 7A FIN 00700 He
116. Single IP Management Group are connected to other groups and devices Possible icons in this screen are as follows Icon Description S Layer 2 commander switch Layer 3 commander switch a Commander switch of other group 62 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Layer 3 candidate switch Unknown device Non SIM devices Tool Tips In the Topology view window the mouse plays an important role in configuration and in viewing device information Setting the mouse cursor over a specific device in the topology window tool tip will display the same information about a specific device as the Tree view does See the window below for an example defanlted Figure 6 39 Device Information Utilizing the Tool Tip Setting the mouse cursor over a line between two devices will display the connection speed between the two devices as shown below 63 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual idefaultled 3e 78 a defaultied 3e ro default 05 05 00 test Figure 6 40 Port Speed Utilizing the Tool Tip 64 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Right Click Right clicking on a device will allow the user to perform various functions depending on the role of the Switch in the SIM group and the icon associated with it Group Icon default 35 2b6 a0
117. TP Select this parameter to set the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP globally on the Switch TX Hold Count 1 10 Used to set the maximum number of Hello packets transmitted per interval The count can be specified from 1 to 10 The default is 3 Forwarding BPDU This field can be Enabled or Disabled When Enabled it allows the forwarding of STP BPDU packets from other network devices The default is Enabled Click Apply to implement changes made 104 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual STP Port Settings STP can be set up on a port per port basis To view the following window click L2 Features gt Spanning Tree gt STP Port Settings From Port Portl Y Enabled vw 0 128 No False Auto Disabled Connection Link Down Yes 2000000 12 Ho Yes Disabled Disabled Enabled Link Down Yes ZQ00000 128 Ho Yes Disabled DisabledEnabled Link Down Yes 2000000 128 Ho Yes Disabled DisabledEnabled Link Down Yes 2000000 12 Ho Yes Disabled Disabled Enabled Link Down Yes ZQ00000 128 Ho Yes Disabled Disabled Enabled Link Down Yes z20000 g 128 Ho Yes Disabled DisabledEnabled 100ML Full one Yes 2000000 126 Heo Yes Forwarding Nonstp Enabled E Link Dewn Yes 2000000 148 Ho Yes Disabled DisabledEnabled 9 LOOM Full H one Yes Z000000 126 Heo Yes Forwarding Nonstp Enabled 10 Link Down Yes 2000000 148 Ho Yes Disabled DisabledEnabled 11 Link Down Yes 2000000 14
118. Use the pull down to enable or disable the twofish192 encryption algorithm The default is Enabled Twofish256 Use the pull down to enable or disable the twofish256 encryption algorithm The default is Enabled Data Integrity Algorithm HMAC SHA1 Use the pull down to enable or disable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the Secure Hash algorithm The default is Enabled HMAC MD5 Use the pull down to enable or disable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the MD5 Message Digest encryption algorithm The default is Enabled Public Key Algorithm HMAC RSA Use the pull down to enable or disable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the RSA encryption algorithm The default is Enabled HMAC DSA Use the pull down to enable or disable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the Digital Signature Algorithm DSA encryption The default is Enabled Click Apply to implement changes made 162 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual SSH User Authentication Mode The following windows are used to configure parameters for users attempting to access the Switch through SSH To access the following window click Security gt SSH gt SSH User Authentication Note Maximum of entries Jel Password Figure 10 28 SSH User Authentication Mode window In the exam
119. VLAN trunk Disabled 802 1X Disabled TELNET Enabled TCP 23 WEB Enabled TCP 80 RMON Disabled CTRL C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All Figure 4 5 show switch command The Switch s MAC address can also be found from the Web management program on the DES 3028 Web Management Tool The IP address for the Switch must be set before 1t can be managed with the Web based manager The Switch IP address can be automatically set using BOOTP or DHCP protocols in which case the actual address assigned to the Switch must be known The IP address may be set using the Command Line Interface CLI over the console serial port as follows Starting at the command line prompt enter the commands config ipif System ipaddress XXX XXX XXX XXX Yyy yyy yyy yyy Where the x s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the y s represent the corresponding subnet mask Alternatively you can enter config ipif System ipaddress xxx xxx xxx xxx z Where the x s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the z represents the corresponding number of subnets in CIDR notation The IP interface named System on the Switch can be assigned an IP address and subnet mask which can then be used to connect a management station to the Switch s Telnet or Web based management agent 20 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual DES 3026 Fas
120. View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Line Chart Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table 171 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Transmitted TX Transmitted TX table allows the user to view the packets transmitted from the Switch To view statistics for a specific port use the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this graph click Monitoring gt Packets gt Transmitted TX Port Apply Pori E Clear View Table Tx Packets Analysis Port Port 1 1000 900 Cee eee Y HEWN Bytes MS 800 fA ENTE A AN HI A A G A A ee rg 600 500 400 300 200 100 Unitipacket lsec Time Interval 1s Record Number 200 ShowHide M Bytes Ww Packets Figure 11 7 Tx Packets Analysis window line graph for Bytes and Packets To view the Transmitted TX Table click the link View Table which will show the following table 172 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Packet Analysis of Port Port 1 lis 0 0 Bytes Packets O O O 0 Unicast Multicast O 0 Broadcast O O Bytes 0 Packets 0 Figure 11 8 Tx Packets Analysis window table for Bytes and Packets The following fields may be set
121. a ed 3e 7E 00 13 46 EDb 3E 78 DES 3026 L2 Switch test test 00 F ull 7o i 0 54 85 50 05 00 DxS 3350SR L3 Switch Figure 6 37 Single IP Management window Tree View The Tree View window holds the following information under the Data tab Parameter Description Device Name This field will display the Device Name of the switches in the SIM group configured by the user If no Device Name is configured by the name it will be given the name default and tagged with the last six digits of the MAC Address to identify it Local Port Displays the number of the physical port on the CS that the MS or CaS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field 61 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Speed Displays the connection speed between the CS and the MS or CaS Remote Port Displays the number of the physical port on the MS or CaS that the CS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field MAC Address Displays the MAC Address of the corresponding Switch Model Name Displays the full Model Name of the corresponding Switch To view the Topology Map click the View menu in the toolbar and then Topology which will produce the following screen The Topology View will refresh itself periodically 20 seconds by default defaultled 38 78 defallted 30 70 idefault05 05 007 test Figure 6 38 Topology view This screen will display how the devices within the
122. a normal VLAN which can be enabled here for Guest VLAN status To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt Configure 802 1X Guest VLAN which will display the following window for the user to configure VLAN Name RG Delete Pin A en Guest YLAN Name RG Guest YLAN Ports 1 Figure 10 17 Guest VLAN Configuration window The following fields may be modified to enable the guest 802 1X VLAN Parameter Description VLAN Name Enter the pre configured VLAN name to create as a Guest 802 1X VLAN Click the Delete check box to remove the selected VLAN from being an 802 1X Guest VLAN Operation The user has three choices in configuring the Guest 802 1X VLAN which are Enabled Selecting this option will enable ports listed in the Port List below as part of the Guest VLAN Be sure that these ports are configured for this VLAN or users will be prompted with an error message Disabled Selecting this option will disable ports listed in the Port List below as part of the Guest VLAN Be sure that these ports are configured for this VLAN or users will be prompted with an error message Delete Selecting this option will delete the VLAN entered in the VLAN Name window above Port List Set the port list of ports of switches in the switch stack to be enabled for the Guest 802 1X VLAN using the pull down menus Click Apply to implement the guest 802 1X VLAN
123. able click CPU Interface Filtering gt CPU Interface Filtering Table 122 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Profle TD 1 Ethernet _Modity IP Modify Packet Content Modify Figure 9 2 CPU Interface Filtering Table To add an entry to the CPU Interface Filtering Table click the Add button This will open the CPU Interface Filtering Configuration page as shown below There are three Access Profile Configuration pages one for Ethernet or MAC address based profile configuration one for IP address based profile configuration and one for the Packet Content Mask You can switch between the three Access Profile Configuration pages by using the Type drop down menu The page shown below is the Ethernet CPU Interface Filtering Configuration page Poemas d source VAC d Destination MAC C d d show Al CPU Intertace Filtermo Table Entries Figure 9 3 CPU Interface Filtering Configuration window Ethernet Parameter Description Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IP address or packet content mask This will change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select P to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s
124. achi Pakistan TEL 92 21 4548158 4548310 FAX 92 21 4535103 Egypt 47 El Merghany street Heliopolis Cairo Egypt TEL 202 2919035 202 2919047 FAX 202 2919051 URL www dlink me com Israel 11 Hamanofim Street Ackerstein Towers Regus Business Center P O B 2148 Hertzelia Pituach 46120 Israel TEL 972 9 9715700 FAX 972 9 9715601 URL www dlink co il Latin America Av Vitacura 2939 floor 6th Las Condes Santiago RM Chile TEL 56 2 5838 950 FAX 56 2 5838 952 URL www dlinkla com Brazil Av das Nacoes Unidas 11857 14 andar cj 141 142 Brooklin Novo Sao Paulo SP Brazil CEP 04578 000 Zip Code TEL 55 11 21859300 FAX 55 11 21859322 URL www dlinkbrasil com br South Africa Einstein Park II Block B 102 106 Witch Hazel Avenue First Floor Block B Einstein Park II Highveld Techno Park Centurion Gauteng Republic of South Africa TEL 27 12 665 2165 FAX 27 12 665 2186 URL www d link co za Russia Grafsky per 14 floor 6 Moscow 129626 Russia TEL 7 495 744 0099 FAX 7 495 744 0099 350 URL www dlink ru Japan K K Level 6 Konan YK Building Konan 2 4 12 Minato Ku Tokyo 108 0075 Japan URL www dlink jp com China No 202 C1 Building Huitong Office Park No 71 Jianguo Road Chaoyang District Beijing 100025 China TEL 86 10 58635800 FAX 86 10 58635799 URL www dlink com cn Taiwan No 289 Sinhu 3rd Rd Neihu District Taipei City
125. ackets residing in the highest priority class of service are transmitted first Once a strict scheduling is implemented for CoS the highest class will work in strict mode and the other classes will remain in a weight fair scheduling mode Higher priority packets always receive preference regardless of the amount of lower priority packets in the buffer and regardless of the time elapsed since any lower priority packets have been transmitted By default the Switch is configured to empty the buffer using strict priority NOTICE The default CoS scheduling arrangement is a strict priority schedule which means 5 the switch will consider the highest class of service to have strict scheduling only while the other queues empty in a round robin method See the config scheduling_mechanism command in this section for more information regarding this subject To use implement round robin weighted priority the Switch s four priority classes of service can be configured to reduce the buffer in a round robin fashion beginning with the highest priority class of service and proceeding to the lowest priority class of service before returning to the highest priority classes of service The weighted priority based scheduling alleviates the main disadvantage of strict priority based scheduling in that lower priority class of service get starved of bandwidth by providing a minimum bandwidth to all classes of service for transmission This is accomplished by
126. al Users To configure Local Users for 802 1X click Security gt 802 1X gt Local Users This window will allow the user to set different 802 1X local users on the Switch Total Entries 2 1 RG 5 EOE Figure 10 14 802 1X Local User Table Configuration and 802 1X Local User Table window Enter a User Name Password and confirmation of that password Properly configured local users will be displayed in the 802 1X Local User Table in the same window 149 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual 802 1X Capability Settings Click Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X Capability Settings to view the following window Poni Port none Apply Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone None Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Figure 10 15 802 1X Capability Settings and Table window To set up the Switch s 802 1X port based authentication select which ports are to be configured in the From and To fields Next enable the ports by selecting Authenticator from the drop down menu under Capability Click Apply to let your change take effect Configure the following 802 1X capability settings Parameter Description From and To Ports being configured for 802 1X settings Capability Two role choices can be selected Authenticator A
127. all will denote all ports on the Switch To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule click 4 in the Access Rule Table to view the following screen TO pco Moe Type HE content Syd sn 0 00000000 0200000000 0x00000000 Ox00000000 Offset 16 31 A T show All CPU Interface Filtering Eule Entries Figure 9 15 CPU Interface Filtering Rule Display Packet Content 132 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Security Traffic Control Port Security Port Lock Entries 802 1X Trusted Host Traffic Segmentation SSH The following section will aid the user in configuring security functions for the Switch The Switch includes various functions for security including Traffic Control Port Security Port Lock Entries 802 1X Trusted Host Traffic Segmentation and SSH all discussed in detail in the following section Traffic Control On a computer network packets such as Multicast packets and Broadcast packets continually flood the network as normal procedure At times this traffic may increase do to a malicious end station on the network or a malfunctioning device such as a faulty network card Thus switch throughput problems will arise and consequently affect the overall performance of the switch network To help rectify this packet storm the Switch will monitor and control the situation The packet storm is monitored to determine if too many
128. allows you to enter the data rate in Kbit s that will be the limit for the selected port The user may choose a rate between 64 and 1024000 Kbit s Click Apply to set the bandwidth control for the selected ports Results of configured Bandwidth Settings will be displayed in the Port Bandwidth Table 113 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual 802 1p Default Priority The Switch allows the assignment of a default 802 1p priority to each port on the Switch To view this table click CoS gt 802 1p Default Priority a O A Pott i Port ov wooo l oo Lh Ja Ly pm S SS se ee eS ee Sl A A A A S A A A a SS A ee S ae 0 0 0 J 0 J 0 0 0 J 0 J 0 J 0 J 0 0 0 0 0 J 0 0 0 J o Figure 8 3 802 1p Default Priority and the 802 1p Default Priority window This page allows you to assign a default 802 1p priority to any given port on the Switch The priority tags are numbered from 0 the lowest priority to 7 the highest priority To implement a new default priority choose a port range by using the From and To pull down menus and then insert a priority value from 0 7 in the Priority field Click Apply to implement your settings 114 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual 802 1p User Priority The Switch allows the assignment of a class of service to each of the 802 1p priorities To view this window click CoS gt 80
129. alue in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte 31 value 32 47 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte 47 value 48 63 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte 63 value 64 79 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to byte 79 Click Apply to implement changes made 126 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual To establish the rule for a previously created CPU Access Profile In the CPU interface folder click the CPU Interface Filtering State link to open the CPU Interface Filtering Table Profle TD Ethernet Macify IFP Maclify Packet Content Modify Figure 9 6 CPU Interface Filtering Table In this window the user may add a rule to a previously created CPU access profile by clicking the corresponding Modify button of the entry to configure Ethernet IP and Packet Content Each entry will open a new and unique window as shown in the examples below CPU Interface hi Rule Table Profle TD Deny Ethernet 1 Xx Show All CPU Interface Filtering Entries Figure 9 7 CPU Interface Filtering Table Ethernet To create a new rule set for an access profile click the Add button A new window is displayed To remove a previously created rule click the corresponding button The following window is used for the Ethernet Rule configuration Permit O Deny f o Ime
130. amount of time in seconds between the Switch receiving a leave 1 16711450 group message from a host and the Switch issuing a group membership query If no response to the membership query is received before the Leave Timer expires the multicast forwarding entry for that host is deleted Querier State Choose Enabled to enable transmitting IGMP Query packets or Disabled to disable The default is Disabled Querier Router This read only field describes the behavior of the router for sending query packets Querier Behavior will denote that the router is sending out IGMP query packets Non Querier will denote that the router is not sending out IGMP query packets This field will only read Querier when the Querier State and the State fields have been Enabled State Select Enabled to implement IGMP Snooping This field is Disabled by default Multicast fast leave This parameter allows the user to enable the Fast Leave function Enabled this function will alow members of a multicast group to leave the group immediately without the implementation of the Last Member Query Timer when an IGMP Leave Report Packet is received by the Switch The default is Disabled Click Apply to implement the new settings Click the Show All IGMP Group Entries link to return to the Current IGMP Snooping Group Entries window NOTE The Fast Leave function is intended for IGMPv2 users wishing to leave a multicast group and is best implemented on VLANs that h
131. and authentication has failed The authentication failure reason will be one of the following RADIUS server time out 802 1X client session timeout This log will be generated when the 802 1X authentication has completed and authentication is successful DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Appendix D Cable Lengths Use the following table to as a guide for the maximum cable lengths Standard Media Type Maximum Distance Mini GBIC 1000BASE LX Single mode fiber module 10km 1000BASE SX Multi mode fiber module 550m 1000BASE LHX Single mode fiber module 40km 1000BASE ZX Single mode fiber module 80km 1000BASE T Category 5e UTP Cable 100m Category 5 UTP Cable 1000 Mbps 100BASE TX Category 5 UTP Cable 100 Mbps 10BASE T Category 3 UTP Cable 10 Mbps 209 Glossary 1000BASE SX A short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 550 meters 1000BASE LX A long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 10 kilometers 100BASE FX 100Mbps Ethernet implementation over fiber 100BASE TX 100Mbps Ethernet implementation over Category 5 and Type 1 Twisted Pair cabling 10BASE T The EEE 802 3 specification for Ethernet over Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP cabling ageing The automatic removal of dynamic entries from the Switch Database which have timed out and are no longer valid ATM Asynchronous Transf
132. and S02 1 COTAS A AAA A A AA A A R 102 SIP Bido GIODaL SCM OS ad AA da LAA TARA 102 SIP AAA A A lia casted A A A E dca Nich 105 TO OPW ae Detection di ai tii alain 107 E iie PE E aran ias 109 Bias rere err aa Si 109 TERE 502 Tp Pror yee dass ES A A T 109 The AdVvamtaces OF COS A E E a ads 110 A A haci had iste ache Gacend Selec saamen aa Mace ch E A Manwile vunauhca dtc ek sumsiteadauaii es santas Meine Gesu tedatetes 111 e a AAA O Sege cd 112 OA DS A A meet foe MYT PaRR ctr a gee Tr OL TY peut MTU mn Le Per ny One NT rrerd WerTe Mire nse a Serre ry mrt a ery eam er are 114 A A ttn ge a erreerne Serene rr 115 COS Sc ne dunlit ct Mechan sii se eons a 115 Bros t 140 0 Bre Vo Alaro 10 loo AP cette rie emer ir otate itr a tiatet geet A A A eer ar ony Ser ee rrr eer ere 116 A o eh atten ck ng aetna O O 117 TOS PAHO SEMINO Steerer eater es nese A A E A AAA A A A E nates Aspnes O 118 BSCE PAo ey SCC TA ATA AA NN e iia 119 Port Map pine Priority Series a SAA A ada 120 MAC Priory SS Cui TA EI E A A TAE EA ATA AN id 121 Sari AAA II E oe CPU Interface Filtering CTA 122 CPU MENICE Eterno State Se tin S sian vusom tule dc suas loli ara bay weaeeead aes 122 CPUMiterrace Filter Tables tii dll ic dei airline dakeitatd 122 Se CU anna dl OO RA eee ereerr se enerr es Wire a A weer hemes NT Ty ONT Sire emt e rte Mere rT en er een arerre 133 Pon SEU ic 137 Por Lock ENOS AA o EEE 139 SUILA a A S 140 02 TX Port Based and MAC Based Access COMO tie
133. ave only one host connected to each port When one host of a group of hosts uses the Fast Leave function it may cause the inadvertent fast leave of other hosts of the group 98 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Static Router Ports Settings A static router port is a port that has a multicast router attached to it Generally this router would have a connection to a WAN or to the Internet Establishing a router port will allow multicast packets coming from the router to be propagated through the network as well as allowing multicast messages IGMP coming from the network to be propagated to the router A router port has the following behavior All IGMP Report packets will be forwarded to the router port IGMP queries from the router port will be flooded to all ports All UDP multicast packets will be forwarded to the router port Because routers do not send IGMP reports or implement IGMP snooping a multicast router connected to the router port of a Layer 3 switch would not be able to receive UDP data streams unless the UDP multicast packets were all forwarded to the router port A router port will be dynamically configured when IGMP query packets RIPv2 multicast DVMRP multicast or PIM DM multicast packets are detected flowing into a port To view this window click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt Static Router Ports Settings Total Entries 2 YLAN Name default EG
134. back occurrence will be noted in the Switch s log Once the loopback problem has stopped this port will be automatically recovered in a time period that can also be specified by the user To configure the settings for the Loopback Detection feature click L2 Features gt Loopback Detection The following fields may be configured Parameter Description Loopdetect Status Disabled v Interval 1 32 767 Recover Time 0 or 60 1000000 From Poti w Poni M Disabled Loopdetect State Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Fort Port 1 2 4 4 5 7 E 3 10 11 Figure 7 19 Loopback Detection window Loop Status Normal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Hermal Choose whether to globally enable or disable the Loopback Detection function by using this pull down menu Loopdetect Status Interval Enter a time interval between 1 and 32767 seconds that CTP packets will be dispatched from Loopback Detection enabled ports If this packet is returned the port will be disabled The default setting is 10 seconds 107 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3
135. between two types of Access Control used on the Switch which are 1 Port Based Access Control This method requires only one user to be authenticated per port by a remote RADIUS server to allow the remaining users on the same port access to the network 2 MAC Based Access Control Using this method the Switch will automatically learn up to eight MAC addresses by port and set them in a list Each MAC address must be authenticated by the Switch using a remote RADIUS server before being allowed access to the Network 143 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Understanding 802 1X Port based and MAC based Network Access Control The original intent behind the development of 802 1X was to leverage the characteristics of point to point in LANs As any single LAN segment in such infrastructures has no more than two devices attached to it one of which is a Bridge Port The Bridge Port detects events that indicate the attachment of an active device at the remote end of the link or an active device becoming inactive These events can be used to control the authorization state of the Port and initiate the process of authenticating the attached device if the Port is unauthorized This is the Port Based Network Access Control Port Based Network Access Control ip RADIUS Server Ethernet Switch CA amp s_a Esa e 5 Ti BBD 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X
136. ch To view the Authenticator State click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt Auth State Force suth ForceAuth ForceAuth ForceAuth ForceAuth ForceAuth ForceAuth ForceAuth ForceAuth ForceAuth ForceAuth Forceauth ForceAuth orceAuth ForceAuth ForceAuth orceAuth es E JCCESS JCCESS JCCESS JCCESS oUCCeSS JUCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS oOUCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS JCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS es a SUCCESS N Figure 11 28 Authenticator State window Port based 802 1X DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Pori Authenticator State Time Interval lis Mac Address Auth PAE state Backend state Port status Figure 11 29 Authenticator State window MAC Based 802 1X This window displays the Authenticator State for individual ports on a selected device A polling interval between and 60 seconds can be set using the drop down menu at the top of the window and clicking OK The information on this window is d
137. coax Ethernet OThin coax Ethernet 010BASE T UTP STP 0100BASE TX O0100BASE T4 O10OVGAnyLAN DOthers 7 What applications are used on your network ODesktop publishing USpreadsheet OWord processing PCAD CAM LiDatabase management HDAccounting DOthers 8 What category best describes your company DAerospace OEngineering Education UFinance OHospital Legal UInsurance Real Estate Manufacturing LRetail Chainstore Wholesale Government OTransportation Utilities Communication OVAR LiSystem house company OOther 9 Would you recommend your D Link product to a friend OYes ONo ODon t know yet 10 Your comments on this product 246 247
138. d the Switch is instructed to get a configuration file via TFTP and it becomes a DHCP client automatically The configuration file will be loaded upon booting up In order to use Auto Config the DHCP server must be set up to deliver the TFTP server IP address and configuration file name information in the DHCP reply packet The TFTP server must be running and have the requested configuration file stored in its base directory when the request is received from the Switch Consult the DHCP server and or TFTP server software instructions for information on Auto Config State loading a configuration file for use by a client Also see the section titled Error Reference source not found for instructions on uploading a configuration to a TFTP server If the Switch is unable to complete the autoconfiguration process the previously saved configuration file present in Switch will be loaded Description Enter a description of up to 128 alphanumeric characters to identify this IP interface Only one IP interface can be set for this switch Click Apply to implement changes made 29 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Setting the Switch s IP Address using the Console Interface Each Switch must be assigned 1ts own IP Address which is used for communication with an SNMP network manager or other TCP IP application for example BOOTP TFTP The Switch s default IP address is 10 90 90 90 You can
139. d Auto Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled 18 Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Link Don Enabled 19 Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled 20 Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Link Don Enabled Al Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Le Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Link Don Enabled 23 Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled 24 Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Link Don Enabled Figure 6 3 Port Configuration and The Port Information Table window 31 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description State Toggle the State lt Enabled gt field to either enable or disable a given port or group of ports Medium dependent interface crossover is a female port connection on the Switch used to connect to end stations servers and hubs The drop down menu allows the user to choose between Auto Normal or Cross Auto will automatically switch to the proper configuration once a cable is connected Normal will be selected if a straight through cable is being used and Cross should be selected if a crossover cable is being used Speed Duplex Toggle the Speed Duplex field to either select the speed and duplex half duplex state of the port Auto denotes auto negotiation between 10 and 100 Mbps devices in full or half duplex The Auto setting allows the port to automatically determine the fastest settings the device the port is connected to can handle an
140. d for use by the network administrator A Bitmask that determines the extent of the subnet that the Switch is on Should be of the form XXX XXX XXX XXX where each xxx is a number represented in decimal between O and 255 The value should be 255 0 0 0 for a Class A network 255 255 0 0 for a Class B network and 255 255 255 0 for a Class C network but custom subnet masks are allowed Default IP address that determines where packets with a destination address outside the current subnet Gateway should be sent This is usually the address of a router or a host acting as an IP gateway If your network is not part of an intranet or you do not want the Switch to be accessible outside your local network you can leave this field unchanged VLAN Name This allows the entry of a VLAN Name from which a management station will be allowed to manage the Switch using TCP IP in band via web manager or Telnet Management stations that are on VLANs other than the one entered here will not be able to manage the Switch in band unless their IP addresses are entered in the Security IP Management menu If VLANs have not yet been configured for the Switch the default VLAN contains all of the Switch s ports There are no entries in the Security IP Management table by default so any management station that can connect to the Switch can access the Switch until a management VLAN is specified or Management Station IP Addresses are assigned When autoconfig is enable
141. d here These settings will only take effect if the priority settings per port are configured for ToS To view this table click CoS gt TOS Priority Settings TN EY Figure 8 8 TOS Priority Setting Select the TOS value from the pull down menu and the Class ID of the priority level mapped to and click the Apply button The new mapping 1s displayed in the Port Priority Table below 118 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual DSCP Priority Settings Use the DSCP Priority Settings menu to configure DSCP priority mapping for Class of Service on the A o o Switch When a packet is received containing this DSCP 3 Y tag it will be mapped to the CoS queue configured here These settings will only take effect if at least one of the priority settings per port is configured for DSCP Type the DSCP bit level and the Class ID priority from the pull down menu mapped to and click the Apply button The new mapping is displayed in the DSCP Priority Table below To view this table click CoS gt DSCP Priority Settings on A Un EW MK O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 8 9 DSCP Priority Setting 119 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Port Mapping Priority Settings Use the
142. d the software and manual DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Front Panel Components and LED Indicators The front panel of the Switch consists of LED indicators for Power Console Link Act and Speed 8 16 24 Fast Ethernet ports DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 two optional module ports DES 3018 3026 only a gigabit LOOOBASE T copper port DES 3010F FL G a I0OBASE FX Ethernet port DES 3010F DES 3010FL only and a SFP Gigabit Ethernet port DES 3010G Also the front panel has a RS 232 communication port DES 3010F 10 100 Fast Ethernet Switch RS 232 Link plans mum OOOO elle Act Figure 1 1 DES 3010F Front Panel DES 3010FL 10 100 Fast Ethernet Switch RS 232 Link pa oun S 3 OOOO Aoi elle Act Figure 1 2 DES 3010FL Front Panel DES 3010G 10 100 Fast Ethernet Switch um O g O a Figure 1 3 DES 3010G Front Panel DES 3016 10 100 Fast Ethernet ai AER D Link Figure 1 4 DES 3016 Front Panel DES 3018 10 100 Fast Ethernet a Figure 1 5 DES 3018 Front Panel DES 3026 10 100 Fast Ethernet Switch Y CE Sess MA Figure 1 6 DES 3026 Front Panel DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual DES 3026 10 100 Fast Ethernet Switch RS 232 O 00000 O Power E OOOO Console E Figure 1 7 DES 3026 LED indicators D Link Compreh
143. d then to use those settings The other options are Auto 10M Half 10M Full 100M Half and 100M Full 1000M Full_M and 1000M Full_S There is no automatic adjustment of port settings with any option other than Auto The Switch allows the user to configure three types of gigabit connections 1000M Full 1000M Full M and 1000M Full_S Gigabit connections are only supported in full duplex connections and take on certain characteristics that are different from the other choices listed The 1000M Full_M master and 1000M Full_S slave parameters refer to connections running a 1000BASE T cable for connection between the Switch port and other device capable of a gigabit connection The master setting 7000M Full_M will allow the port to advertise capabilities related to duplex speed and physical layer type The master setting will also determine the master and slave relationship between the two connected physical layers This relationship is necessary for establishing the timing control between the two physical layers The timing control is set on a master physical layer by a local source The slave setting 1000M Full_S uses loop timing where the timing comes form a data stream received from the master lf one connection is set for 1000M Full_M the other side of the connection must be set for 1000M Full S Any other configuration will result in a link down status for both ports Fiber optic ports are statically set and unchangeable at 1000Mbps in Full
144. disable the SMTP service on this device SMTP Server Address Enter the IP address of the SMTP server on a remote device This will be the device that sends out the mail for you SMTP Server Port Enter the virtual port number that the Switch will connect with on the SMTP server The common port number for SMTP is 25 yet a value between 1 and 65535 can be chosen Self Mail Address Enter the e mail address from which mail messages will be sent This address will be the from address on the e mail message sent to a recipient Only one self mail address can be configured for this Switch This string can be no more that 64 alphanumeric characters Mail Receiver Address Enter a list of e mail addresses so recipients can receive e mail messages regarding Switch functions Up to 8 e mail addresses can be added per Switch Do delete these addresses from the Switch click it s corresponding X under the Delete heading in the Mail Receiver Address Table Click Apply to implement changes made 76 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual SMTP Service The following window is used to send test messages to all mail recipients configured on the Switch thus testing the configurations set and the reliability of the SMTP server To access the following window click Administration gt SMTP Service gt SMTP Service lt lt Content Figure 6 61 SMTP Mail Service The
145. e 6 13 Current System Log Host window The parameters configured for adding and editing System Log Server settings are the same To add a new Syslog Server click the Add button To modify a current entry click the hyperlinked number of the server in the Index field Both actions will result in the same screen to configure See the table below for a description of the parameters in the following window Index 1 4 1 Host IP 0 0 0 0 gt EVerity Warning v Facility Locall UDP Port 514 or 5000 65535 514 Disabled Show All System Log Servers Figure 6 14 Configure System Log Server Add The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Index 1 4 Syslog server settings index 1 4 Hostie The IP address of the Syslog server Severity This drop down menu allows you to select the level of messages that will be sent The options are Warning Informational and All Facility Some of the operating system daemons and processes have been assigned Facility values Processes and daemons that have not been explicitly assigned a Facility may use any of the local use facilities or they may use the user level Facility Those Facilities that have been designated are shown in the following Bold font denotes the facility values that the Switch currently implements Numerical Facility kernel messages user level messages mail s
146. e Backend Authentication State will display one of the following Request Response Success Fail Timeout Idle or Initialize The Operational Controlled Directions are both and in PortStatus The status of the controlled port can be Authorized or Unauthorized 153 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Initializing Ports for MAC Based 802 1X To initialize ports for the MAC side of 802 1X the user must first enable 802 1X by MAC address in the Advanced Settings window To view the following window click Security gt 802 1X gt Initialize Port s Poni Brom Th Po d Nac Address d dl Figure 10 19 Initialize Ports MAC based 802 1X To initialize ports first choose the range of ports in the From and To field Then the user must specify the MAC address to be initialized by entering 1t into the MAC Address field and checking the corresponding check box To begin the initialization click Apply NOTE The user must first globally enable 802 1X in the DES 3026 Web Management Tool window before reauthenticating ports Information in the Initialize Ports Table cannot be viewed before enabling 802 1X NOTE The uplink module ports DES 3010F FL G ports 9 10 DES 3018 ports 17 18 DES 3026 ports 25 26 do not support the 802 1X function Reauthenticate Port s for Port Based 802 1X
147. e Diagnostics Port Mirroring System Log Settings SNTP Settings MAC Notification Settings TFTP Services Ping Test SNMP Manager IP MAC Binding Single IP Setting Forwarding amp Filtering SMTP Service and DHCP BOOTP Relay Section 7 L2 Features A discussion of the layer 2 features of the Switch including Static VLAN Entry VLAN Trunk Settings Trunking IGMP Snooping Spanning Tree and Loopback Detection Section 8 CoS A detailed discussion regarding Port Bandwidth 802 1p Default Priority 802 1p User Priority CoS Scheduling Mechanism CoS Output Scheduling Priority Settings TOS Priority Settings DSCP Priority Settings Port Mapping Priority Settings and MAC Priority Section 9 CPU Interface Filtering This section deals with the CPU Interface Filtering features on this Switch including CPU Interface Filtering State and CPU Interface Filtering Table Section 10 Security A detailed discussion about the security features on the Switch including Traffic Control Port Security Port Lock Entries 802 1X Trusted Host Traffic Segmentation and SSH Section 11 Monitoring Features graphs and screens used in monitoring features and packets on the Switch including CPU Utilization Port Utilization Packers Packet Errors Packet Size VLAN Status MAC Address Switch Log Log Settings IGMP Snooping Group Browse Router Port Browse ARP Table and Session Table Appendix A Technical Specifications This discusses the t
148. e SNMP function on the Switch To view this window click Administration gt SNMP Manager gt SNMP Trap Settings Tras So Authenticate Traps State Enabled e Figure 6 20 SNMP Trap Settings window To enable or disable the Traps State and or the Authenticate Traps State use the corresponding pull down menu to change and click Apply SNMP User Table The SNMP User Table displays all of the currently configured SNMP Users on the Switch To view this window click Administration gt SNMP Manager gt SNMP User Table Add Total Entries 1 Note Itis allowed insert 10 entries into the table only SNMP User Table initial initial V3 x Figure 6 21 SNMP User Table To delete an existing SNMP User Table entry click the X below the Delete heading corresponding to the entry you wish to delete To display the detailed entry for a given user click on the hyperlinked User Name This will open the SNMP User Table Display page as shown below User Name Group Name AAKIF Version Auth Protocol iv Protocal Figure 6 22 SNMP User Table Display The following parameters are displayed Parameter Description UserName An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the SNMP users 47 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Group Name This name is used to specify the SNMP group created
149. e m HH VIM SS Figure 6 15 Current Time Settings window The following parameters can be set or are displayed Parameter Description Time Settings Current Time Time Source Displays the source of the time settings viewed here SNTP Secondary The IP address of the secondary server the SNTP information will be taken from Server SNTP Poll Interval in The interval in seconds between requests for updated SNTP information Seconds Month Ener curent month you would Ike to update the system co 41 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Time in HH MM SS Enter the current time in hours minutes and seconds if you would like to update the system clock Click Apply to implement your changes Time Zone and DST The following are screens used to configure time zones and Daylight Savings time settings for SNTP To display this window click Administration gt SNTP Settings gt Time Zone and DST Daylight Saving Time State Disabled Daylight Saving Time Offset in Minutes ime Zone Otfset trom GMT in HH MM Ob Y DO From Which Week of the month From Which Day of the Week From Which Month From What Time HA MM o Which Week o Which Day o Which Month o What Time HA Mit From What Month From What Date From What Time o What Month o What Date o What Time Figure 6 16 Time Zone and DST Settings page The followin
150. e number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to HELD as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication failure authFail TRUE ReauthsAuthenticating Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of a reauthentication request reAuthenticate TRUE EapStartsAuthenticating Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of an EAPOL Start message being received from the Supplicant EapLogOffAuthenticating Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of an EAPOL Logoff message being received from the Supplicant ReauthsAuthenticated Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING as a result of a reauthentication request reAuthenticate TRUE EapStartsAuthenticated Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING as a result of an EAPOL Start message being received from the Supplicant EapLogOffAuthenticated Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to DISCONNECTED as a result of an EAPOL Logoff message being received from the Supplicant Responses Counts the number of times that the state machine sends an initial Access Request packet to the Authentication s
151. e reauthenticating ports Information in the Reauthenticate Ports Table cannot be viewed before enabling 802 1X NOTE The uplink module ports DES 3010F G ports 9 10 DES 3018 ports 17 18 DES 3026 ports 25 26 do not support the 802 1X function Reauthenticate Port s for MAC based 802 1X To reauthenticate ports for the MAC side of 802 1 X the user must first enable 802 1X by MAC address in the Advanced Settings window To view the following window click Security gt 802 1X gt Reauthenticate Port s From e OE Mac Address L 00 00 Figure 10 21 Reauthenticate Ports MAC based 802 1X To reauthenticate ports first choose the range of ports in the From and To field Then the user must specify the MAC address to be reauthenticated by entering it into the MAC Address field and checking the corresponding check box To begin the reauthentication click Apply 155 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual RADIUS Server The RADIUS feature of the Switch allows you to facilitate centralized user administration as well as providing protection against a sniffing active hacker The Web Manager offers three windows To view the following window click Security gt 802 1X gt RADIUS Server Retransmit 1 255
152. e second The following fields can be viewed Parameter Description Port The identification number assigned to the Port by the System in which the Port resides FramesRx The number of user data frames received on this port during the session The number of user data frames transmitted on this port during the session UserName The User Name representing the identity of the Supplicant PAE The duration of the session in seconds Terminate Cause The reason for the session termination There are eight possible reasons for termination 1 Supplicant Logoff 2 Port Failure 3 Supplicant Restart 4 Reauthentication Failure 5 AuthControlledPortControl set to ForceUnauthorized 6 Port re initialization 7 Port Administratively Disabled 8 Not Terminated Yet OctetsRx The number of octets received in user data frames on this port during the session Octets Tx The number of octets transmitted in user data frames on this port during the session A unique identifier for the session in the form of a printable ASCII string of at least three characters Authentic Method The authentication method used to establish the session Valid Authentic Methods include 1 Remote Authentic Server The Authentication Server is external to the Authenticator s System 2 Local Authentic Server The Authentication Server is located within the Authenticator s System Auth Statistics This table contains the statistics objects for the Auth
153. echnical specifications of the DES 3016 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3018 and DES 3026 switches Appendix B Cables and Connectors Describes the RJ 45 receptacle connector straight through and crossover cables and standard pin assignments Appendix C Cable Lengths Gives information on cable types and maximum distances Glossary Lists definitions for terms and acronyms used in this document DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Intended Readers The DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 User Manual contains information for setup and management of the Switch This manual is intended for network managers familiar with network management concepts and terminology Typographical Conventions Convention Description In a command line square brackets indicate an optional entry For example copy filename means that optionally you can type copy followed by the name of the file Do not type the brackets Bold font Indicates a button a toolbar icon menu or menu item For example Open the File menu and choose Cancel Used for emphasis May also indicate system messages or prompts appearing on your screen For example You have mail Bold font is also used to represent filenames program names and commands For example use the copy command Boldface Indicates commands and responses to prompts that must be typed exactly as printed in the Typewriter
154. ed DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 State Disabled DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Check Disabled DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Policy Replace v Figure 6 62 DHCP BOOTP Relay Global Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description BOOTP Relay State This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu It is used to enable or disable the DHCP BOOTP Relay service on the Switch The default is Disabled BOOTP Relay Hops This field allows an entry between 7 and 76 to define the maximum number of router hops Count Limit 1 16 DHCP BOOTP messages can be forwarded across The default hop count is 4 BOOTP Relay Time Allows an entry between 0 and 65535 seconds and defines the maximum time limit for Threshold 0 65535 routing a DHCP BOOTP packet If a value of O is entered the Switch will not process the value in the seconds field of the BOOTP or DHCP packet If a non zero value is entered the Switch will use that value along with the hop count to determine whether to forward a given BOOTP or DHCP packet DHCP Vendor class Allows the user to Enable or Disable the DHCP relay option 60 on the Switch The default is Identifier option 60 Disabled stale Enabled Allows the relay servers priority based on option 60 If the
155. egistration Register your D Link product online at http support dlink com register Product registration is entirely voluntary and failure to complete or return this form will not diminish your warranty rights Tech Support Technical Support You can find software updates and user documentation on the D Link website D Link provides free technical support for customers within the United States and within Canada for the duration of the service period and warranty confirmation service during the warranty period on this product U S and Canadian customers can contact D Link technical support through our website or by phone Tech Support for customers within the United States D Link Technical Support over the Telephone 877 354 6555 Monday to Friday 8 00am to 5 00pm PST D Link Technical Support over the Internet http support dlink com email support dlink com Tech Support for customers within Canada D Link Technical Support over the Telephone 1 800 361 5265 Monday to Friday 7 30am to 9 00pm EST D Link Technical Support over the Internet http support dlink com email support dlink ca D Link Building Networks for People Technical Support D Link UK Technical Support over the Telephone 0871 873 3000 United Kingdom BT 10ppm UK Pence per minute other carriers may vary Times Mon Fri 9 00am 6 00pm Sat 10 00am 2 00pm 1890 886 899 Ireland 0 05ppm peak 0 045ppm off peak Times Mon Fr
156. elete On Timeout 20 Disabled 1 Delete On Timeout 2 Disabled 1 Delete On Timeout fe Disabled l Delete nTime out 2 Disabled 1 Delete On Timeout 24 Disabled l Delete nTime out Figure 10 2 Port Security Settings and Table window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port 137 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Admin State This pull down menu allows you to enable or disable Port Security locked MAC address table for the selected ports Max Addr 0 10 The number of MAC addresses that will be in the MAC address forwarding table for the selected switch and group of ports Lock Address This pull down menu allows you to select how the MAC address table locking will be Mode implemented on the Switch for the selected group of ports The options are Permanent The locked addresses will not age out after the aging timer expires DeleteOn Timeout The locked addresses will age out after the aging timer expires DeleteOnReset The locked addresses will not age out until the Switch has been reset Click Apply to implement changes made NOTE The uplink module ports DES 3010F FL G ports 9 10 DES 3018 ports 17 18 DES 3026 ports 25 26 do not support the port security function 138 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual
157. en previously configured triggers require the log to be saved to the Syslog host Use the config syslog host command to determine what triggers are used time_interval Choose this option to save log files periodically based on the time specified in the Time Interval field Time Interval Specifies the minimum interval between saves in minutes Click Apply to implement changes made 183 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual IGMP Snooping Group This window allows the Switch s IGMP Snooping Group Table to be viewed IGMP Snooping allows the Switch to read the Multicast Group IP address and the corresponding MAC address from IGMP packets that pass through the Switch The number of IGMP reports that were snooped is displayed in the Reports field To view the IGMP Snooping Group Table click Monitoring gt IGMP Snooping Group Vid O Search Total Entries ISMP Snooping Group Table 0 000 0 0 D0 00 00 00 D00 00 J Port Map 45676 5 oo a fafa xis x67 a8 9 a0 2 29 25 24 25 25 Figure 11 19 IGMP Snooping Group Table The user may search the IGMP Snooping Group Table by VID by entering it in the top left hand corner and clicking Search The following field can be viewed Parameter Description Port Map These are the ports where the IGMP packets were snooped are displayed NOTE To configure IGMP snooping for the Switch go to the L2 Features folder and
158. enance or repair voids this Limited Warranty Disclaimer of Other Warranties EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY SPECIFIED HEREIN THE PRODUCT IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY CANNOT BE DISCLAIMED IN ANY TERRITORY WHERE A PRODUCT IS SOLD THE DURATION OF SUCH IMPLIED WARRANTY SHALL BE LIMITED TO NINETY 90 DAYS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY COVERED UNDER THE LIMITED WARRANTY PROVIDED HEREIN THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY SELECTION AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT IS WITH THE PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT Limitation of Liability TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW D LINK IS NOT LIABLE UNDER ANY CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY FOR ANY LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT INCONVENIENCE OR DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER WHETHER DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFIT WORK STOPPAGE COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION FAILURE OF OTHER EQUIPMENT OR COMPUTER PROGRAMS TO WHICH D LINK S PRODUCT IS CONNECTED WITH LOSS OF INFORMATION OR DATA CONTAINED IN STORED ON OR INTEGRATED WITH ANY PRODUCT RETURNED TO D LINK FOR WARRANTY SERVICE RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THE PRODUCT RELATING TO WARRANTY SERVICE OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY EVEN IF D LINK HAS BEEN
159. enge and the Access Request that matched it from this RADIUS authentication server AccessRetrans The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS authentication server PendingRequests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for this server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Access Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject or Access Challenge a timeout or retransmission AccessResponses The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Signature attributes or known types are not included as malformed access responses UnknownTypes The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the authentication port BadAuthenticators The number of RADIUS Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Signature attributes received from this server PacketsDropped The number of RADIUS packets of which were received from this server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason 187 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual RADIUS Accounting This window shows managed objects used for managing RADIUS accounting clients and the current statistics associated with them It has one row for each RADIUS
160. ensive LED indicators display the status of the Switch and the network This LED will light green after the Switch is powered on to indicate the normal operation of the Switch s power supplies The indicator is dark when the Switch is powered off Console This LED should blink during the Power On Self Test POST When the POST is fin ished successfully the LED goes dark This indicator will light solid green when the Switch is being logged into via out of band local console management through the RS 232 console port in the front of the Switch using a straight through serial cable Link Act When the LED mode has been changed to Link Act the LEDs will light steady green to indicate a valid link A blinking LED indicates activity on the port Speed To the right of every Link Act LED lies the speed LED corresponding to every port Depending on the switch model these lights will assume different roles DES 3010F FL G A solid green LED indicates the port is transferring data at 100Mbps while a dark unlit LED will indicate a rate of 10Mbps Port 9 The LED of this port when lit solid green indicates a transfer rate of 1000Mbps When this LED is unlit it denotes a transfer rate of 10 100Mbps Port 10 For the 3010F and 3010FL a solid green LED indicates a transfer rate of 100Mbps and a dark LED indicates no link For the 3010G solid green LED indicates a transfer rate of 1000Mbps and a dark LED indicates no link DES 3018 DES
161. enticator PAE associated with each port An entry appears in this table for each port that supports the Authenticator function To view the Authenticator Statistics click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt Auth Statistics 192 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Authenticator Statistics Time Interval lis 1 al 0 0 0 0 0 0 f a Figure 11 27 Authenticator Statistics window The user may select the desired time interval to update the statistics between s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second The following fields can be viewed Parameter Description The number of EAP Request frames other than Rq ld frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator 193 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Rx Invalid The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized Rx Error The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame 194 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Auth State The following section describes the 802 1X Status on the Swit
162. eople Teknisk Support Du finder software opdateringer og bruger dokumentation pa D Link s hjemmeside D Link tilbyder gratis teknisk support til kunder Danmark i hele produktets garantiperiode Danske kunder kan kontakte D Link s tekniske support via vores hjemmeside eller telefonisk D Link teknisk support over telefonen TIf 7026 9040 Abningstider kl 08 00 20 00 D Link teknisk support pa Internettet Web http www dlink dk D Link Building Networks for People Teknista tukea asiakkaille Suomessa D Link tarjoaa teknist tukea asiakkailleen Tuotteen takuun voimassaoloajan Tekninen tuki palvelee seuraavasti numerosta 0800 114 677 Arkisin klo 9 21 Internetin kautta Web http www dlink fi D Link Building Networks for People Teknisk Support P v r hemsida kan du hitta mer information om mjukvaru uppdateringar och annan anvandarinformation D Link tillhandahaller teknisk support till kunder i Sverige under hela garantitiden for denna produkt D Link Teknisk Support via telefon 0770 33 00 35 Vardagar 08 00 20 00 D Link Teknisk Support via Internet Web http www dlink se D Link Building Networks for People Suporte T cnico Voc pode encontrar atualiza es de software e documenta o de utilizador no site de D Link Portugal http www dlink pt A D Link fornece suporte t cnico gratuito para clientes no Portugal durante o per odo de vig ncia de garan
163. er Mode A connection oriented transmission protocol based on fixed length cells packets ATM is designed to carry a complete range of user traffic including voice data and video signals auto negotiation A feature on a port which allows it to advertise its capabilities for speed duplex and flow control When connected to an end station that also supports auto negotiation the link can self detect its optimum operating setup backbone port A port which does not learn device addresses and which receives all frames with an unknown address Backbone ports are normally used to connect the Switch to the backbone of your network Note that backbone ports were formerly known as designated downlink ports backbone The part of a network used as the primary path for transporting traffic between network segments bandwidth Information capacity measured in bits per second that a channel can transmit The bandwidth of Ethernet is 10Mbps the bandwidth of Fast Ethernet is 100Mbps baud rate The switching speed of a line Also known as line speed between network segments BOOTP The BOOTP protocol allows you to automatically map an IP address to a given MAC address each time a device is started In addition the protocol can assign the subnet mask and default gateway to a device bridge A device that interconnects local or remote networks no matter what higher level protocols are involved Bridges form a single logical network centralizing network administ
164. er Network Password window Leave both the User Name field and the Password field blank and click OK This will open the Web based user interface The Switch management features available in the web based manager are explained below Web based User Interface The user interface provides access to various Switch configuration and management screens allows you to view performance statistics and permits you to graphically monitor the system status Areas of the User Interface The figure below shows the user interface The user interface is divided into three distinct areas as described in the table 23 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual DES 3026 os 3 fh oo 5 e Es Ss Area 2 DLink Building Networks for People selee bbb Lk Administration L2 Features Cos CPU Interface Filtering security Monitoring Reset Reboot System Save Changes Logout Area Device Type PRE Ethernet Switch 10 73 21 42 Manual Boot PROM Yersion Firmware Version Faria Ves System Name System Location System Contact MAC Notification Disabled Detail settings Single IP Management Disabled Detail settings Never v Address Aging Time 10 1000000 MAC Source Disabled v Figure 5 2 Main Web Manager Screen Function Select the menu or window to be displayed The folder icons can be opened to display the hyper linked menu buttons and subfolders conta
165. er On Plug one end of the AC power cord into the power connector of the Switch and the other end into the local power source outlet After the Switch is powered on the LED indicators will momentarily blink This blinking of the LED indicators represents a reset of the system As a precaution in the event of a power failure unplug the Switch When power is resumed plug the Switch back in DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual The Optional Modules At the front right of the DES 3018 and the DES 3026 resides an optional module slot These optional modules specially designed for this Switch series may be used as an uplink to a server or core switch This slot may be equipped with a single port Uplink Module sold separately See the explanation of the optional modules below Figure 2 4 DEM 301T Optional Module Figure 2 5 DEM 301G Optional Module DEM 201F 1 Port 100Base FX Module DEM 20 1FL 1 Port 100Base FX Module Figure 2 7 DEM 201FL Optional Module Single Port 1000BASE T Gigabit Ethernet uplink module Compliant with IEEE802 3 IEEE802 3u IEEE802 3ab Comprehensive LEDs for Speed Link and Act ivity Supports auto negotiation in 10 100 1000M full duplex back pressure in half duplex and IEEE802 3x compliant flow control for full duplex Single Port SFP gigabit uplink module Compliant with IEEE802 3z Link and Act ivity LED Supports auto negot
166. er Port of the group is to be configured by the user and all configuration options including the VLAN configuration that can be applied to the Master Port are applied to the entire link aggregation group Load balancing is automatically applied to the ports in the aggregated group and a link failure within the group causes the network traffic to be directed to the remaining links in the group The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat a link aggregation group as a single link on the switch level On the port level the STP will use the port parameters of the Master Port in the calculation of port cost and in determining the state of the link aggregation group If two redundant link aggregation groups are configured on the Switch STP will block one entire group in the same way STP will block a single port that has a redundant link 92 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual VLAN Trunk Settings The VLAN Trunk Settings table allows the user to configure a port or range of ports as VLAN trunk ports by default none of the ports on the Switch are VLAN trunk ports unless configured To view this window click L2 Features gt VLAN Trunk Settings VLAN Trunk Status Disabled Poti v Disabled Wlember Forts Figure 7 8 VLAN Trunk Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Use the pull down menu to
167. er automatically gets Administrator level privileges It is recommended to create at least one Admin level user account for the Switch 17 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Password Protection The DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 switch does not have a default user name and password One of the first tasks when setting up the Switch 1s to create user accounts If you log in using a predefined administrator level user name you have privileged access to the Switch s management software After your initial login define new passwords for both default user names to prevent unauthorized access to the Switch and record the passwords for future reference To create an administrator level account for the Switch do the following At the CLI login prompt enter create account admin followed by the lt user name gt and press the Enter key You will be asked to provide a password Type the lt password gt used for the administrator account being created and press the Enter key You will be prompted to enter the same password again to verify it Type the same password and press the Enter key Successful creation of the new administrator account will be verified by a Success message NOTE Passwords are case sensitive User names and passwords can be up to 15 characters in length The sample below illustrates a successful creation of a new administrator le
168. erver i e executes sendRespToServer on entry to the RESPONSE state Indicates that the Authenticator attempted communication with the Authentication Server Counts the number of times that the state machine receives an initial Access AccessChallenges Challenge packet from the Authentication server i e aReq becomes TRUE causing exit from the RESPONSE state Indicates that the Authentication Server has communication with the Authenticator OtherReqToSupp Counts the number of times that the state machine sends an EAP Request packet other than an Identity Notification Failure or Success message to the Supplicant 190 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual i e executes txReq on entry to the REQUEST state Indicates that the Authenticator chose an EAP method ResponsesFromSupplicant Counts the number of times that the state machine receives a response from the Supplicant to an initial EAP Request and the response is something other than EAP NAK i e rxResp becomes TRUE causing the state machine to transition from REQUEST to RESPONSE and the response is not an EAP NAK Indicates that the Supplicant can respond to the Authenticator s chosen EAP method AuthSuccesses Counts the number of times that the state machine receives an Accept message from the Authentication Server i e aSuccess becomes TRUE causing a transition from RESPONSE to SUCCESS Indicates that the
169. es and discontinues forwarding multicast packets when there are no longer hosts requesting that they continue Use the IGMP Snooping Group Entry Table to view the IGMP Snooping status To modify the settings click the Modify button for the VLAN Name entry you want to change To view this window click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Total Entries 2 default Disabled Disabled Modify EG Disabled Disabled Modify Figure 7 12 Current IGMP Snooping Group Entries Clicking the Modify button will open the IGMP Snooping Settings menu shown below VLAN ID VLAN Name G Query Interval 1 65535 Max Response Time 1 25 Robustness Value 1 255 E Last Member Query Interval 1 25 Host Timeout 1 16711450 Router Timeout 1 16711450 Leave Timer 1 16711450 Querier State Disabled Querier Router Behavior Non Querier Multicast fast leave Disabled M Show ANIGMP Group Entries Figure 7 13 IGMP Snooping Settings Edit window 97 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual The following parameters may be viewed or modified Parameter Description VLAN ID This is the VLAN ID that along with the VLAN Name identifies
170. escribed as follows Parameter Description MAC Address Displays the Authenticator MAC address Auth PAE State The Authenticator PAE State value can be Initialize Disconnected Connecting Authenticating Authenticated Aborting Held Force_Auth or Force_Unauth Backend State The Backend Authentication State can be Request Response Success Fail Timeout Idle or Initialize Controlled Port Status can be Authorized or Unauthorized 196 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Reset The Reset function has several options when resetting the Switch Some of the current configuration parameters can be retained while resetting all other configuration parameters to their factory defaults NOTE Only the Reset System option will enter the factory default parameters into the Switch s non volatile RAM and then restart the Switch All other options enter the factory defaults into the current configuration but do not save this configuration Reset System will return the Switch s configuration to the state it was when it left the factory O Reset Proceed wath system reset except IP address Reset Config Proceed with system reset gt Reset System Proceed with system reset reset all save reboot Figure 11 30 Factory Reset to Default Value window 197 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Reboot System The f
171. esoocetecesuesess toseecacenaeseutsoacetesnsaasees ouetiemeeeees 209 Cable Lena ld al ela 209 O 210 Warrants and ES IA a o dE 212 Tech SUPPO iia A AAA EE E EEEE 218 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Preface The DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 User Manual is divided into sections that describe the system installation and operating instructions with examples Section 1 Introduction Describes the Switch and its features Section 2 Installation Helps you get started with the basic installation of the Switch and also describes the front panel rear panel side panels and LED indicators of the Switch Section 3 Connecting the Switch Tells how you can connect the Switch to your Ethernet network Section 4 Introduction to Switch Management Introduces basic Switch management features including password protection SNMP settings IP address assignment and connecting devices to the Switch Section 5 Introduction to Web based Switch Management This section discusses connecting to and using the Web based switch management feature on the Switch Section 6 Administration A detailed discussion about configuring some of the basic functions of the Switch including accessing the Switch information using the Switch s utilities and setting up network configurations such as assigning an IP address Port Configurations User Accounts Password Encryption Cabl
172. ets A value between 1 and 55 can be specified Click Apply to implement changes made 116 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Priority Settings The Priority Setting window will allow users to configure the CoS priority settings on a port per port basis When CoS tagged packets arrive on the switch they are mapped to the settings configured here For example if a port has been assigned a MAC priority the packet that has the CoS priority assigned to a MAC address will be sent to the CoS queue configured for that MAC address Once the configuration has been completed users may see the results in the Priority Settings Table seen here After configuring the port priorities users may adjust the individual CoS settings on the other windows located in the CoS folder of the Switch To view the following window click CoS gt Priority Settings Poti Port none mae Port Port Priority Ethernet Priority 1 ott 62 lp priority ott E otf 602 lp priority otf E ott 62 lp priority ott 4 off 602 lp prority otf 5 ott 602 lp priority ott off 602 lp prority otf d ott 62 lp priority ott z otf 602 lp priority otf 3 ott 62 lp priority ott 10 ott 602 lp priority ott 11 ott 602 lp priority ott 12 ott 602 lp priority ott l3 otf 602 lp priority ott 14 ott 602 lp priority ott US otf Ue lp priority ott 16 ott 602 lp priority ott l7 otf 602 lp priority ott 1s ott 602 lp priority
173. evice VLAN Virtual LAN A group of location and topology independent devices that communicate as if they are on a common physical LAN VLT Virtual LAN Trunk A Switch to Switch link which carries traffic for all the VLANs on each Switch VT100 A type of terminal that uses ASCII characters VT100 screens have a text based appearance 211 Warranties and Registration LIMITED WARRANTY D Link provides this limited warranty for 1ts product only to the person or entity who originally purchased the product from D Link or its authorized reseller or distributor D Link would fulfill the warranty obligation according to the local warranty policy in which you purchased our products Limited Hardware Warranty D Link warrants that the hardware portion of the D Link products described below Hardware will be free from material defects in workmanship and materials from the date of original retail purchase of the Hardware for the period set forth below applicable to the product type Warranty Period if the Hardware is used and serviced in accordance with applicable documentation provided that a completed Registration Card is returned to an Authorized D Link Service Office within ninety 90 days after the date of original retail purchase of the Hardware If a completed Registration Card is not received by an authorized D Link Service Office within such ninety 90 period then the Warranty Period shall be ninety 90 days from the date of
174. following parameters can be set Parameter Description Subject Enter the subject of the test e mail Enter the content of the test e mail Once your message is ready click Send to send this mail to all recipients configured on the Switch for SMTP va DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual DHCP BOOTP Relay The relay hops count limit allows the maximum number of hops routers that the DHCP BOOTP messages can be relayed through to be set If a packet s hop count is more than the hop count limit the packet is dropped The range is between and 6 hops with a default value of 4 The relay time threshold sets the minimum time in seconds that the Switch will wait before forwarding a BOOTREQUEST packet If the value in the seconds field of the packet 1s less than the relay time threshold the packet will be dropped The range is between 0 and 65 536 seconds with a default value of O seconds DHCP BOOTP Relay Global Settings To enable and configure DHCP BOOTP Relay Global Settings on the Switch click Administration gt DHCP BOOTP Relay gt DHCP BOOTP Relay Global Settings DHCPBOOTP Relay State Disabled DHCPROOTP Relay Hops Count Limit 1 16 4 DHCP ROOTP Relay Time Threshold 0 65535 I DHCP Vendor class identifier option 60 State Disabled DHCP Chent identifier option 61 State Disabl
175. forwarded and the destination port transmits it on its attached network segment This process is referred to as ingress filtering and is used to conserve bandwidth within the Switch by dropping packets that are not on the same VLAN as the ingress port at the point of reception This eliminates the subsequent processing of packets that will just be dropped by the destination port Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLANs are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default Packets cannot cross VLANs If a member of one VLAN wants to connect to another VLAN the link must be through an external router NOTE If no VLANs are configured on the Switch then all packets will be forwarded to any destination port Packets with unknown source addresses will be flooded to all ports Broadcast and multicast packets will also be flooded to all ports An example is presented below VLAN Name Switch Ports System default 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 9 10 11 12 Marketing 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 Table 7 1 VLAN Example Assigned Ports VLAN Segmentation Take for example a packet that is transmitted by a machine on Port 1 that is a member of VLAN 2 If the destination lies on another port found through a normal forwarding table lookup the Switch then l
176. g parameters can be set Parameter Description Time Zone and DST Daylight Saving Use this pull down menu to enable DST Repeating Settings Repeating or DST Annual Time State Settings Annual Selecting one of these will allow its corresponding field to be configured Daylight Saving Use this pull down menu to specify the amount of time that will constitute your local DST offset Time Offset in 30 60 90 or 120 minutes Minutes Time Zone Offset Use these pull down menus to specify your local time zone s offset from Greenwich Mean Time from GMT in GMT HH MM 42 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual DST Repeating Settings Using repeating mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment Repeating mode requires that the DST beginning and ending date be specified using a formula For example specify to begin DST on Saturday during the second week of April and end DST on Sunday during the last week of October From Which Week Enter the week of the month that DST will start of the month From Which Day of Enter the day of the week that DST will start on the Week From Which Month Enter the month DST will start on From What Time Enter the time of day that DST will start on HH MM To Which Week Enter the week of the month the DST will end To Which Day Enter the day of the week that DST will end To Which Month Enter the month that DST will end To What Time Enter
177. gers e After a component is inserted into the rack carefully extend the rail into a locking position and then slide the component into the rack e Do not overload the AC supply branch circuit that provides power to the rack The total rack load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating e Ensure that proper airflow is provided to components in the rack e Do not step on or stand on any component when servicing other components in a rack NOTE A qualified electrician must perform all connections to DC power and to safety grounds All electrical wiring must comply with applicable local or national codes and practices xii DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual CAUTION Never defeat the ground conductor or operate the equipment in the absence of a suitably installed ground conductor Contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or an electrician if you are uncertain that suitable grounding is available CAUTION The system chassis must be positively grounded to the rack cabinet frame Do not attempt to connect power to the system until grounding cables are connected Completed power and safety ground wiring must be inspected by a qualified electrical inspector An energy hazard will exist if the safety ground cable is omitted or disconnected Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge Static electricity can harm delicate components inside your system T
178. gle Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision 177 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Packet Size The Web Manager allows packets received by the Switch arranged in six groups and classed by size to be viewed as either a line graph or a table Two windows are offered To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Packet Size Clear yiew Table Packet Size Analysis Port Port 1 1000 900 ang r BOO 500 400 200 100 0 UE EAE Unitipacketisec Time Interval IE Record Number 200 Show Hide w 64 Ww 65 127 W 128 255 w 256 511 W 512 1023 Iw 1024 1518 Figure 11 13 Rx Size Analysis window line graph 178 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual To view the Packet Size Analysis Table click the link View Table which will show the following table Wew Line Chart Packet Analysis of Port1 Time interval is Packet Size Totallsec 0 65 1427 128 255 206 911 212 1023 1024 1515 Figure 11 14 Rx Size Analysis window table The following fields can be set or viewed Parameter Description T
179. group that will be represented by a single icon Expand to expand the SIM group in detail Remove from group remove a member from a group Configure launch the web management to configure the Switch Property to pop up a window to display the device information 66 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Property Device Nare kdefauit 05 05 00 Module Mame DGS 33248R La Switch Wac Address 00 06 01 05 05 00 Remote Port Ho J Local Port Mao 24 Port Speed OO F ull Close ieee Applet Window Figure 6 46 Property window Candidate Switch Icon A Collapse Add to group Add to group Property Property Figure 6 47 Right Clicking a Candidate icon The following options may appear for the user to configure Collapse to collapse the group that will be represented by a single icon Expand to expand the SIM group in detail Add to group add a candidate to a group Clicking this option will reveal the following screen for the user to enter a password for authentication from the Candidate Switch before being added to the SIM group Click OK to enter the password or Cancel to exit the window Input password Password Java Applet Window Figure 6 48 Input password window Property to pop up a window to display the device information as shown below 67 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 D
180. h Manual Port Configuration This section contains information for configuring various attributes and properties for individual physical ports including port speed and includes windows for Port Settings Port Description and Port Error Disabled Port Settings Click Administration gt Port Configuration gt Port Settings to display the following window To configure switch ports Choose the port or sequential range of ports using the From To port pull down menus Use the remaining pull down menus to configure the parameters described below Speed Duplex Port Foti Enabled Auta Auto v Disabled Apply Connection Duplex Flowttrl Learning Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Link Don Enabled i Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled 5 Enabled Auto Auto Disabled LOOM Full one Enabled Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled 5 Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Link Don Enabled Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled E Enabled Auto Auto Disabled LOOM Full one Enabled 5 Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Y Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Link Lowen Enabled 10 Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled 11 Enabled Auto Auto Disabled LinkDown Enabled l2 Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled l3 Enabled Auto Auto Disabled LinkDown Enabled 14 Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled l Enabled Auto Auto Disabled LinkDown Enabled 16 Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled l Enable
181. h in the applicable documentation from the date of original delivery of the Software for a period of ninety 90 days Warranty Period if the Software is properly installed on approved hardware and operated as contemplated in its documentation D Link further warrants that during the Warranty Period the magnetic media on which D Link delivers the Software will be free of physical defects D Link s sole obligation shall be to replace the non conforming Software or defective media with software that substantially conforms to D Link s functional specifications for the Software Except as otherwise agreed by D Link in writing the replacement Software is provided only to the original licensee and is subject to the terms and conditions of the license granted by D Link for the Software The Warranty Period shall extend for an additional ninety 90 days after any replacement Software is delivered If a material non conformance is incapable of correction or if D Link determines in its sole discretion that it 1s not practical to replace the non conforming Software the price paid by the original licensee for the non conforming Software will be refunded by D Link provided that the non conforming Software and all copies thereof is first returned to D Link The license granted respecting any Software for which a refund is given automatically terminates What You Must Do For Warranty Service Registration Card The Registration Card provided at t
182. have no 802 1Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant network device to a non compliant network device Ingress Filtering A port on a switch where packets are flowing into the Switch and VLAN decisions must be made is referred to as an ingress port If ingress filtering is enabled for a port the Switch will examine the VLAN information in the packet header if present and decide whether or not to forward the packet If the packet is tagged with VLAN information the ingress port will first determine if the ingress port itself is a member of the tagged VLAN If it is not the packet will be dropped If the ingress port is a member of the 802 1Q VLAN the Switch then determines if the destination port is a member of the 802 1Q VLAN If it 87 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual is not the packet is dropped If the destination port is a member of the 802 1Q VLAN the packet is forwarded and the destination port transmits it to its attached network segment If the packet 1s not tagged with VLAN information the ingress port will tag the packet with its own PVID as a VID if the port is a tagging port The switch then determines if the destination port is a member of the same VLAN has the same VID as the ingress port If it does not the packet is dropped If it has the same VID the packet is
183. he VLAN status for each of the Switch s ports to be viewed by VLAN This window displays the ports on the Switch that are currently Egress E or Tag T ports To view the following table click Monitoring gt VLAN Status VLAN Name Total Entries 1 A Name VLAN Type default static pars Seco 11121314 1516171819 0011 02 05 145 15117289 2012122131242576 Tag mala aaa aaa aaa aaa 00000000000000000000000000 OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO 882 amp Figure 11 15 VLAN Status window Enter the VLAN Name and or the VID and click Find the information will be displayed in the table below 180 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual MAC Address This allows the Switch s dynamic MAC address forwarding table to be viewed When the Switch learns an association between a MAC address and a port number it makes an entry into its forwarding table These entries are then used to forward packets through the Switch To view the MAC Address forwarding table click Monitoring gt MAC Address VLAN Name MAC Address Fort default default default default default default default default default default default default default default default default default default default 00 00 00 00 00 00 Pont yi 00 00 00 00 00 01 D0 00 5E 00 01 5E D0 00 51 94 F2 BA DO 00 51 94 F 2 F4 00 01 44 F4 2 68 00 03 09
184. he back of this manual must be completed and returned to an Authorized D Link Service Office for each D Link product within ninety 90 days after the product is purchased and or licensed The addresses telephone fax list of the nearest Authorized D Link Service Office is provided in the back of this manual FAILURE TO PROPERLY COMPLETE AND TIMELY RETURN THE REGISTRATION CARD MAY AFFECT THE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT Submitting A Claim Any claim under this limited warranty must be submitted in writing before the end of the Warranty Period to an Authorized D Link Service Office The claim must include a written description of the Hardware defect or Software nonconformance in sufficient detail to allow D Link to confirm the same The original product owner must obtain a Return Material Authorization RMA number from the Authorized D Link Service Office and if requested provide written proof of purchase of the product such as a copy of the dated purchase invoice for the product before the warranty service is provided After an RMA number is issued the defective product must be packaged securely in the original or other suitable shipping package to ensure that it will not be damaged in transit and the RMA number must be prominently marked on the outside of the package The packaged product shall be insured and shipped to Authorized D Link Service Office with all shipping costs prepaid D Link may reject or return any product that is not packaged and shi
185. he listening and learning states An edge port loses its status if it receives a BPDU packet immediately becoming a normal spanning tree port P2P Port A P2P port is also capable of rapid transition P2P ports may be used to connect to other bridges Under RSTP all ports operating in full duplex mode are considered to be P2P ports unless manually overridden through configuration 802 1D and 802 1w Compatibility RSTP can interoperate with legacy equipment and is capable of automatically adjusting BPDU packets to 802 1D format when necessary However any segment using 802 1D STP will not benefit from the rapid transition and rapid topology change detection of RSTP The protocol also provides for a variable used for migration in the event that legacy equipment on a segment is updated to use RSTP The Spanning Tree Protocol STP operates on two levels 1 On the switch level the settings are globally implemented 2 On the port level the settings are implemented on a per user defined group of ports basis STP Bridge Global Settings To open the following window click L2 features gt Spanning Tree gt STP Bridge Global Settings 102 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Spanning Tree Protocol Disabled A Bridge Max Age 6 40 Sec 20 Bridge Hello Time 1 10 Sec 2 Bridge Forward Delay 4 30 Sec 15 Bridge Priority 0 61440 32768 Default Path Cost a02 1T SIP Version TX H
186. he user may join other switches to this Switch over Ethernet to be part of its SIM group Choosing this option will also enable the Switch to be configured for SIM Discovery Interval The user may set the discovery protocol interval in seconds that the Switch will send out discovery packets Returning information to a Commander Switch will include information about other switches connected to it Ex MS CaS The user may set the Discovery Interval from 30 to 90 seconds 60 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual This parameter may be set for the time in seconds the Switch will hold information sent to it from other switches utilizing the Discovery Interval The user may set the hold time from 100 to 255 seconds Click Apply to implement the settings changed After enabling the Switch to be a Commander Switch CS the Single IP Management folder will then contain three added links to aid the user in configuring SIM through the web including Topology Firmware Upgrade and Configuration Backup Restore Topology The Topology window will be used to configure and manage the Switch within the SIM group and requires Java script to function properly on your computer The Java Runtime Environment on your server should initiate and lead you to the topology window as seen below File Group Device View Help J Data Device name Local port Speed Remote port Mac Address Model name E er
187. hich enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLANs allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources 85 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual VLANs can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLANs will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLANs allows VLANs to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers The tagging feature allows VLANs to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally The IEEE 802 1Q standard restricts the forwarding of untagged packets to the VLAN of which the receiving port is a member The main characteristics of IEEE 802 1Q are as follows 802 1Q Packet Forwarding Assigns packets to VLANs by filtering Assumes the presence of a single global spanning tree f Packet Transmitted Uses an explicit tagging scheme with one level tagging e 802 1Q VLAN Packet
188. his information 2 Once a destination MAC has been added to the FDB users must then configure the appropriate queue to be mapped to this destination MAC address using the following window 3 Once the previous parameters are set users should go to the Priority Settings window located in this folder and set the egress ports on the switch to MAC Priority These ports must only be set for MAC Priority and not for any other priority choice Please be advised that the default priority setting 1s for 802 1p and users must change the priority to MAC Priority for this function to work properly Be sure that the device with this destination MAC address is connected to the port for which this priority is configured To view this table click CoS gt MAC Priority 00 00 00 00 00 00 Oo Apply IA Figure 8 11 MAC Priority Setting Type in the MAC Address select the Class ID priority level and click the Apply button 121 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual CPU Interface Filtering CPU Interface Filtering State CPU Interface Filtering Table CPU Interface Filtering Due to needed extra switch security the DES 3000 switch series incorporates CPU Interface filtering This added feature increases the running security of the Switch by enabling the user to create a list of access rules for packets destined for the Switch s CPU interface CPU interface filtering examines Ethe
189. https rma dlink com e After an RMA number is issued the defective product must be packaged securely in the original or other suitable shipping package to ensure that it will not be damaged in transit and the RMA number must be prominently marked on the outside of the package Do not include any manuals or accessories in the shipping package D Link will only replace the defective portion of the product and will not ship back any accessories e The customer is responsible for all in bound shipping charges to D Link No Cash on Delivery COD is allowed Products sent COD will either be rejected by D Link or become the property of D Link Products shall be fully insured by the customer and shipped to D Link Systems Inc 17595 Mt Herrmann Fountain Valley CA 92708 D Link will not be held responsible for any packages that are lost in transit to D Link The repaired or replaced packages will be shipped to the customer via UPS Ground or any common carrier selected by D Link Return shipping charges shall be prepaid by D Link if you use an address in the United States otherwise we will ship the product to you freight collect Expedited shipping is available upon request and provided shipping charges are prepaid by the customer D Link may reject or return any product that is not packaged and shipped in strict compliance with the foregoing requirements or for which an RMA number is not visible from the outside of the package The product owner agree
190. i 9 00am 6 00pm Sat 10 00am 2 00pm D Link UK amp Ireland Technical Support over the Internet http www dlink co uk ftp ftp dlink co uk D Link Building Networks for People Technische Unterstutzung Aktualisierte Versionen von Software und Benutzerhandbuch finden Sie auf der Website von D Link D Link bietet kostenfreie technische Unterstutzung fur Kunden innerhalb Deutschlands Osterreichs der Schweiz und Osteuropas Unsere Kunden konnen technische Unterstutzung uber unsere Website per E Mail oder telefonisch anfordern Telefon 49 1805 2787 0 14 pro Minute Web http www dlink de E Mail support dlink de D Link Building Networks for People Assistance technique Vous trouverez la documentation et les logiciels les plus r cents sur le site web D Link Vous pouvez contacter le service technique de D Link par notre site internet ou par t l phone Assistance technique D Link par t l phone 0 820 0803 03 0 12 min Hours Monday Friday 9h to 13h and 14h to 19h Saturday 9h to 13h and from 14h to 16h Assistance technique D Link sur internet Web http www dlink fr E mail support dlink fr D Link Building Networks for People Asistencia T cnica Puede encontrar las ltimas versiones de software as como documentaci n t cnica en el sitio web de D Link D Link ofrece asistencia t cnica gratuita para clientes residentes en Espa a durante el periodo de garant a del pr
191. iation in full duplex and IEEE802 3x compliant flow control for full duplex Support for DEM 310GT DEM 311GT DEM 314GT DEM 315GT Single Port 100BASE FX fast Ethernet uplink module Compliant with IEEE802 3u Link and Act ivity LED Supports forced 100M full duplex and IEEE802 3x compliant flow control for full duplex SC Type connector good over 2km distance Single Port 100BASE FX fast Ethernet uplink module Compliant with IEEE802 3u Link and Act ivity LED Supports forced 100M full duplex and IEEE802 3x compliant flow control for full duplex SC Type connector good over 15km distance 10 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual To install the modules follow the simple steps listed below CAUTION Before adding the optional module make sure to disconnect all power sources connected to the Switch Failure to do so may result in an electrical shock which may cause damage not only to the individual but to the Switch as well At the front of the Switch to the right 1s the slot for the optional module as shown in Figure 2 8 and Figure 2 9 This slot should be covered with a faceplate that can be easily removed by loosening the screws and pulling off the plate Optional Module Slots Optional Module Slots Figure 2 9 Optional Module slot at the front of the DES 3026 Take the module and gently slide it in to the available slot at the front of the Switch until it reaches
192. ic that needs to go from one segment to another from one port to another is automatically forwarded by the Switch without interfering with any other segments ports This allows the total network capacity to be multiplied while still maintaining the same network cabling and adapter cards For Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet networks a switch is an effective way of eliminating problems of chaining hubs beyond the two repeater limit A switch can be used to split parts of the network into different collision domains for example making it possible to expand your Fast Ethernet network beyond the 205 meter network diameter limit for LOOBASE TX networks Switches supporting both traditional 10Mbps Ethernet and 100Mbps Fast Ethernet are also ideal for bridging between existing 10Mbps networks and new 100Mbps networks DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Switching LAN technology is a marked improvement over the previous generation of network bridges which were characterized by higher latencies Routers have also been used to segment local area networks but the cost of a router and the setup and maintenance required make routers relatively impractical Today s switches are an ideal solution to most kinds of local area network congestion problems NOTE For customers interested in D View D Link Corporation s proprietary SNMP management software go to the D Link Website www dlink com and downloa
193. ield Entering all will denote all ports on the Switch To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule click 4 in the Access Rule Table to view the following screen Figure 9 12 CPU Interface Filtering Rule Display IP The following window is the CPU Interface Filtering Rule Table for Packet Content CPU Interface Filtering Rule Table Profle TD 3 Pee o View x Content Show All CEU Interface Filtering Entries Figure 9 13 CPU Interface Filtering Rule Table Packet Content 130 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual To remove a previously created rule select it and click the button To add a new Access Rule click the Add button Profile ID 4 Pat O Dery Acceso M Offset_0 15 Offset 16 31 Show All CPU Intertace Fiterne Eule Entries Figure 9 14 CPU Interface Filtering Rule Configuration Packet Content To set the Access Rule for Packe
194. iew this window click Administration gt DHCP BOOTP Relay gt DHCP Relay Option 61 Settings Add Clear All DHCP Relay Option 61 Table Total Entries 0 Figure 6 69 DHCP Relay Option 61 Settings window To delete an entry enter the appropriate information and click Delete to remove all entries click Clear All To add a new entry click Add the following screen will appear for the user to configure Chet D MAC Address String Max 255 characters Relay Rule O ORe eg 10 90 90 90 O Drop show DHCP Relay Option 61 Table Figure 6 70 DHCP Relay Option 61 Settings window Add The following parameters may be set Parameter Description Client ID The client may be identified by either the MAC Address or by the user specified String Choose the desired method and enter the appropriate information for the Client ID 83 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Relay Rule The relay rule is specified to determine that the relay server is based on option 61 When option_61 is enabled if the packet does not have option 61 then the relay servers cannot be determined based on option 61 If relay servers are determined based on option 60 and one relay server is determined based on option 61 the final relay servers will be the union of these two sets of servers lf the relay servers are determined based on option 60
195. ime Interval 1s Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 1024 1518 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Check whether or not to display 64 65 127 128 255 256 511 512 1023 and 1024 1518 packets received 179 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual VLAN Status This allows t
196. ined 86 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual IEEE 802 1Q Tag Octets G 1 2 3 4 Destination Address 6 octets Source Address 6 octets EtherType GxeI00 J Tag Contr Information Begining of Data Ese oi ert VEAN TE VEB 2 Bs 3 bits 1 bit 12 bits Figure 7 2 IEEE 802 1Q Tag The EtherType and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address but before the original EtherType Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than 1t was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE 602 103 Tag Orginal Ethernat Figure 7 3 Adding an IEEE 802 1Q Tag Tagging and Untagging Every port on an 802 1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagging or untagging Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into and out of it If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802 1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet forwarding decisions Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1Q tag from all packets that flow into and out of those ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 1Q VLAN tag the port will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will
197. ined within them Click the D Link logo to go to the D Link website Presents a graphical near real time image of the front panel of the Switch This area displays the Switch s ports and expansion modules showing port activity duplex mode or flow control depending on the specified mode Various areas of the graphic can be selected for performing management functions including port configuration The user may also choose the device statistical refresh interval by using the pull down menu in this section Area3 Presents switch information based on your selection and the entry of configuration data NOTICE Any changes made to the Switch configuration during the current 5 session must be saved in the Save Changes web menu explained below or by using the command line interface CLI command save 24 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Web Pages When you connect to the management mode of the Switch with a web browser a login screen 1s displayed Enter a user name and password to access the Switch s management mode Below is a list and description of the main folders available in the web interface Administration Contains screens concerning configurations for IP Address Port Configuration User Accounts Password Encryption Cable Diagnostics Port Mirroring System Log Settings SNTP Settings MAC Notification Settings TFTP Services Ping Test SNMP Manager IP MAC Binding
198. information in this manual will be universal to the total group of Switches Corresponding screen pictures of the web manager may be taken from any one of these switches but the configuration will be identical except for varying port counts For the remainder of this document we will refer primarily to the DES 3026 as the switch in question for examples configurations and explanations Switch Description The DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 is a high performance 8 16 24 port Fast Ethernet switch Comprising 10 100Mbps switched unshielded twisted pair UTP and Auto MDI X MDI II convertible ports and each model having its own uplink port capability this Switch will be ideal for segmenting networks into smaller sub connected networks for optimum throughput capability of the most demanding multimedia and imaging applications available on the network without creating bottlenecks These ports can also be used for connecting PCs printers servers hubs routers switches and other networking devices each supporting up to 200 Mbps of throughput in full duplex mode The open slots available on the DES 3018 DES 3026 models the gigabit port on the DES 3010G and the fiber optic port on the DES 3010F and DES 3010FL can provide an uplink to a server or network backbone The built in console interface can be used to configure the Switch s settings for priority queuing VLANs and port trunk groups port monitoring and port speed
199. ing is 30 seconds QuietPeriod This allows you to set the number of seconds that the Switch remains in the quiet 147 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual state following a failed authentication exchange with the client The default setting is 60 seconds SuppTimeout This value determines timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the client The default setting is 30 seconds ServerTimeout This value determines timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the authentication server The default setting is 30 seconds MaxReq The maximum number of times that the Switch will retransmit an EAP Request to the client before it times out of the authentication sessions The default setting is 2 ReAuthPeriod A constant that defines a nonzero number of seconds between periodic re authentication of the client The default setting is 3600 seconds ReAuth Determines whether regular re authentication will take place on this port The default setting is Disabled Forward EAPOL PDU This function allows the user to Enable or Disable the EAPOL PDU received by the Both port Click Apply to implement your configuration changes To view configurations for the 802 1X Authenticator Settings on a port by port basis click the link Show Authenticators Setting 148 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Loc
200. ings Password Enable c Publickey Enabled Host based Enabled 3DES CBC Enabled vw Blow fish CBC Enabled AES128 CBC Enabled AES192 CBC Enabled Y AES256 CBC Enabled Enabled Castl128 CBC Enabled v Twofish128 Enabled Twofish192 Enabled Twofish236 Enabled HMAC SHAI Enabled v HMAC MDS Enabled HMAC RSA HMAC DSA Figure 10 27 SSH Server Authentication Mode and Algorithm Settings window The following algorithms may be set Parameter Description Authentication Algorithm Password This field may be enabled or disabled to choose if the administrator wishes to use a locally configured password for authentication on the Switch This field is Enabled by default Public Key This field may be enabled or disabled to choose if the administrator wishes to use a publickey configuration set on a SSH server for authentication This field is Enabled by default Host based This field may be enabled or disabled to choose if the administrator wishes to use a host computer for authentication This parameter is intended for Linux users
201. ink Corporation All rights reserved UserName Figure 4 1 Initial screen after first connection 16 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual First Time Connecting to the Switch The Switch supports user based security that can allow you to prevent unauthorized users from accessing the Switch or changing its settings This section tells how to log onto the Switch NOTE The passwords used to access the Switch are case sensitive therefore S is not the same as s When you first connect to the Switch you will be presented with the first login screen shown below NOTE Press Ctrl R to refresh the screen This command can be used at any time to force the console program in the Switch to refresh the console screen DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Command Line Interface Firmware Build 4 20 B27 Copyright C 2007 D Link Corporation All rights reserved UserName Figure 4 2 Initial screen first time connecting to the Switch Press Enter in both the Username and Password fields You will be given access to the command prompt DES 3026 4 as shown below There is no initial username or password Leave the Username and Password fields blank DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Command Line Interface Firmware Build 4 20 B27 Copyright C 2007 D Link Corporation All rights reserved UserName PassWord DES 3026 4 _ Figure 4 3 Command Prompt NOTE The first us
202. intain this status for example if the port is forced to half duplex operation the p2p status changes to operate as if the p2p value were False The default setting for this parameter is True BPDU Choosing Enabled will allow the forwarding of BPDU packets in the specified ports from other network devices This will go into effect only if STP is globally disabled AND Forwarding BPDU is globally enabled See STP Bridge Global Settings above The default setting Disabled does not forward BPDU packets when STP is disabled Click Apply to implement changes made NOTE To enable Forwarding BPDU on a per port basis the following settings must first be in effect 1 STP must be globally disabled and 2 Forwarding BPDU must be globally enabled These are the default settings configurable in the STP Bridge Global Settings menu discussed previously 106 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Loopback Detection The Loopback Detection function is used to identify loops occurring between the Switch and a device that is directly connected to it This process is accomplished by the use of a Configuration Testing Protocol CTP packet that is generated by the switch Users may set the dispatching time interval of the CTP packet and once a CTP packet has returned to the port from where it originated the Loopback Detection function will disable this port until the anomaly has ceased and the loop
203. intermediary between the Authentication Server and the Client The Authenticator server has two purposes when utilizing 802 1 X The first purpose is to request certification information from the Client through EAPOL packets which is the only information allowed to pass through the Authenticator before access is granted to the Client The second purpose of the Authenticator is to verify the information gathered from the Client with the Authentication Server and to then relay that information back to the Client Three steps must be implemented on the Switch to properly configure the Authenticator 1 The 802 1X State must be Enabled 2 The 802 1X settings must be implemented by port 3 A RADIUS server must be configured on the Switch Switch Authenticator RADIUS Server Workstation Authentication Server Client Figure 10 7 The Authenticator 141 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Client The Client is simply the end station that wishes to gain access to the LAN or switch services All end stations must be running software that is compliant with the 802 1X protocol For users running Windows XP that software 1s included within the operating system All other users are required to attain 802 1X client software from an outside source The Client will request access to the LAN and or Switch through EAPOL packets and in turn will respond to requests from the Switch
204. ion fragments a nor mal network occurrence OverSize Counts packets received that were longer than 1518 octets or if a VLAN frame is 1522 octets and less than the MAX_PKT_LEN Internally MAX_PKT_LEN is equal to 1522 The number of packets less than 64 bytes with either bad framing or an invalid CRC These are normally the result of collisions MAX_PKT_LEN is equal to 1522 The number of packets that are dropped by this port since the last Switch reboot Show Hide Check whether or not to display Crc Error Under Size Over Size Fragment Jabber and Drop errors Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Line Chart Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table The number of packets with lengths more than the MAX _PKT_LEN bytes Internally 175 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Transmitted TX The following graph displays the error packets received on the Switch To view statistics for a specific port select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Packet Errors gt Transmitted TX Port Apply Port 15 Apply Clear View Table Tx Error Ana
205. l Performance Transmission Method Store and forward RAM Buffer 32M Bytes per device Filtering Address Table 8K MAC address per device Packet Filtering Forwarding Rate 14 880 pps per 10Mbps 148 809 pps per 100Mbps 1 488 100 pps per 1000Mbps MAC Address Learning Automatic update 202 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Appendix B Cables and Connectors When connecting the Switch to another switch a bridge or hub a normal cable is necessary Please review these products for matching cable pin assignment The following diagrams and tables show the standard RJ 45 receptacle connector and their pin assignments Appendix 1 1 The standard RJ 45 port and connector RJ 45 Pin Assignments Contact MDI X Port MDI II Port Appendix 1 2 The standard RJ 45 pin assignments 203 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Appendix C System Log Entries download was unsuccessful by console was unsuccessful Username 204 lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt are XOR shown in log string Item Cat Event Log Information Severity Remark Enhancement Description 1 system System started up Unit lt unitID gt System Critical For all projects except started up DES 3526 4 Configuration Unit lt unitlD gt Informational by console and IP
206. l LA kx en E a Port None Apply Note tis only valid to set up at most 4 member ports of any one trunk group and a port can be a member of only one trunk group at a time show All Fort T ne Group Entries Figure 7 10 Link Aggregation Group Configuration window Add To return to the Port Trunking Group Entries Table click the hyperlinked Show All Port Trunking Group Entries 94 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual LACP Port Settings This window allows the user to create port trunking groups on the Switch Using the following window the user may set which ports will be active and passive in processing and sending LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol control frames To view the LACP Settings window click L2 Features gt Trunking gt LACP Port Settings Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive Figure 7 11 LACP Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port Active Active LACP ports are capable of processing and sending LACP control frames This 95 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual allows LA
207. l and dry place for the acceptable temperature and humidity operating ranges Install the Switch in a site free from strong electromagnetic field generators such as motors vibration dust and direct exposure to sunlight When installing the Switch on a level surface attach the rubber feet to the bottom of the device The rubber feet cushion the Switch protect the casing from scratches and prevent it from scratching other surfaces DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Installing the Switch without the Rack When installing the Switch on a desktop or shelf the rubber feet included with the Switch should first be attached Attach these cushioning feet on the bottom at each corner of the device Allow enough ventilation space between the Switch and any other objects in the vicinity 1 Rubber Feet t Rubber Feet gt t Figure 2 1 Prepare Switch for installation on a desktop or shelf Installing the Switch in a Rack The Switch can be mounted in a standard 19 rack Use the following diagrams to guide you Figure 2 2 Fasten mounting brackets to Switch Fasten the mounting brackets to the Switch using the screws provided With the brackets attached securely you can mount the Switch in a standard rack as shown in Figure 2 3 on the following page Mounting the Switch in a Standard 19 Rack Figure 2 3 Installing Switch in a rack Pow
208. l spanning tree but the root bridge concept is replaced with a root port concept A root port is a port of the group that 1s elected based on port priority and port cost to be the connection to the network for the group Redundant links will be blocked just as redundant links are blocked on the switch level The STP on the switch level blocks redundant links between switches and similar network devices The port level STP will block redundant links within an STP Group It 1s advisable to define an STP Group to correspond to a VLAN group of ports 105 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual The following fields can be set Parameter Description A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port State Used to Enable or Disable the STP port state settings on the Switch Cost 0 Auto External Cost This defines a metric that indicates the relative cost of forwarding packets to the specified port list Port cost can be set automatically or as a metric value The default value is O auto O auto Setting O for the external cost will automatically set the speed for forwarding packets to the specified port s in the list for optimal efficiency Default port cost 100Mbps port 200000 Gigabit port 20000 value 1 2000000 Define a value between 1 and 2000000 to determine the external cost The lower the number the greater the probability the port wi
209. l upgrade by console was lt ipaddr gt MAC unsuccessful lt macaddr gt are XOR Username shown in log string lt username gt IP which means if user lt ipaddr gt MAC login by console will no lt macaddr gt IP and MAC information for logging V 17 Configuration Configuration Informational by console and IP successfully successfully lt ipaddr gt MAC downloaded downloaded by console lt macaddr gt are XOR Username shown in log string lt username gt IP which means if user lt ipaddr gt MAC login by console will no lt macaddr gt IP and MAC information for logging V 18 Configuration Configuration download Warning by console and IP V DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual which means if user login by console will no IP and MAC information for logging lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macadar gt Configuration Configuration Informational successfully successfully uploaded by console and IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt are XOR shown in log string which means if user login by console will no IP and MAC information for logging Configuration Configuration upload by Warning by console and IP upload was console was lt ipaddr gt MAC unsuccessful unsuccessful lt macaddr gt are XOR Username shown in log string lt username gt IP which means if user lt ipaddr gt MAC login by console will no lt macaddr
210. lev Table Rx Packets Analysis Port Port 7 1000 900 Unicast E 800 Multicast AU Broadcast 600 500 400 300 00 100 Unitipacketisec Time Interval 15 Record Number 00 ShowHide W Unicast We Multicast W Broadcast Figure 11 5 Rx Packets Analysis window line graph for Unicast Multicast and Broadcast Packets To view the UMB Cast Table click the View Table link which will show the following table 170 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Packet Analysis of Port Port 7 lis y Bytes Packets Unicast Multicast Broadcast Bytes Packets Figure 11 6 Rx Packets Analysis window table for Unicast Multicast and Broadcast Packets The following fields may be set or viewed Parameter Description Time Interval 1s Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number 200 Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a unicast address Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a multicast address Broadcast Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a broadcast address Show Hide Check whether or not to display Multicast Broadcast and Unicast Packets Clear Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window
211. lick Apply To return to the SNMP Host Table click the Show All SNMP Host Table Entries link 53 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual SNMP Engine ID The Engine ID is a unique identifier used for SNMP V3 implementations This is an alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the Switch To display the Switch s SNMP Engine ID click Administration gt SNMP Manager gt SNMP Engine ID 800000ab03001346ed3 Figure 6 31 SNMP Engine ID Configuration window To change the Engine ID enter the new Engine ID in the space provided and click the Apply button 54 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual IP MAC Port Binding IMPB The IP network layer uses a four byte address The Ethernet link layer uses a six byte MAC address Binding these two address types together allows the transmission of data between the layers The primary purpose of IP MAC binding is to restrict the access to a switch to a number of authorized users Only the authorized client can access the Switch s port by checking the pair of IP MAC addresses with the pre configured database If an unauthorized user tries to access an IP MAC binding enabled port the system will block the access by dropping its packet The maximum number of IP MAC binding entries 1s dependant on chip capability e g the ARP table size and storage size of the
212. ll be chosen to forward packets Priority A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port Setting this parameter as yes will set the ports to send out BPDU packets to other bridges requesting information on their STP setting If the Switch is configured for RSTP the port will be capable to migrate from 802 1D STP to 802 1w RSTP Migration should be set as yes on ports connected to network stations or segments that are capable of being upgraded to 802 1w RSTP on all or some portion of the segment Choosing the true parameter designates the port as an edge port Edge ports cannot create loops however an edge port can lose edge port status if a topology change creates a potential for a loop An edge port normally should not receive BPDU packets If a BPDU packet is received it automatically loses edge port status Choosing the false parameter indicates that the port does not have edge port status Choosing the True parameter indicates a point to point P2P shared link P2P ports are similar to edge ports however they are restricted in that a P2P port must operate in full duplex Like edge ports P2P ports transition to a forwarding state rapidly thus benefiting from RSTP A p2p value of false indicates that the port cannot have p2p status Auto allows the port to have p2p status whenever possible and operate as if the p2p status were true lf the port cannot ma
213. ll other switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge The user may choose a time between 6 and 40 seconds The default value is 20 Bridge Hello Time The Hello Time can be set from 1 to 10 seconds This is the interval between two 1 10 Sec transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge Bridge Forward Delay The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds Any port on the Switch spends this time 4 30 Sec in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state Bridge Priority 0 61440 A Priority for the Switch can be set from O to 61440 This number is used in the voting process between Switches on the network to determine which Switch will be the root Switch A low number indicates a high priority and a high probability that this Switch will be elected as the root Switch Default Path Cost This read only field displays the protocol used in determining the default path cost per port 802 1t will calculate this 32 bit cost value through the use of a specific formula based on the port bandwidth STP Version Use the pull down menu to choose the desired version of STP to be implemented on the Switch There are two choices STPCompatibility Select this parameter to set the Spanning Tree Protocol STP globally on the switch RS
214. longs However if a MS has its own IP address it can belong to SNMP communities to which other switches in the group including the CS do not belong SIM Using the Web Interface All switches are set as Candidate CaS switches as their factory default configuration and Single IP Management will be disabled To enable SIM for the Switch using the Web interface click Administration gt Single IP Settings gt SIM Settings AIVI State Disabled Figure 6 35 SIM Settings window disabled Change the SIM State to Enabled using the pull down menu and click Apply The screen will then refresh and the SIM Settings window will look like this Enabled v Candidate v 30 30 30 sec 100 100 255 sec Apply Figure 6 36 SIM Settings window Enabled The following parameters can be set Parameters Description Use the pull down menu to either enable or disable the SIM state on the Switch Disabled will render all SIM functions on the Switch inoperable Role State Use the pull down menu to change the SIM role of the Switch The two choices are Candidate A Candidate Switch CaS is not the member of a SIM group but is connected to a Commander Switch This is the default setting for the SIM role Commander Choosing this parameter will make the Switch a Commander Switch CS T
215. lsinki Finland TEL 358 10 309 8840 FAX 358 10 309 8841 URL www dlink fi France 41 boulevard Vauban 78280 Guyancourt France TEL 33 0 1 30 23 86 88 FAX 33 0 1 30 23 86 89 URL www dlink fr Germany Schwalbacher Strasse 74 D 65760 Eschborn Germany TEL 49 0 6196 77 99 0 FAX 49 0 6196 77 99 300 URL www dlink de Greece 101 Panagoulis Str 163 43 Heliopolis Athens Greece TEL 30 210 9914512 FAX 30 210 9916902 URL www dlink gr Hungary R k czi ut 70 72 HU 1074 Budapest Hungary TEL 36 0 1 461 30 00 FAX 36 0 1 461 30 04 URL www dlink hu Italy Via Nino Bonnet n 6 b 20154 Milano Italy TEL 39 02 2900 0676 FAX 39 02 2900 1723 URL www dlink it Luxembourg Rue des Colonies 11 B 1000 Brussels Belgium TEL 32 0 2 517 7111 FAX 32 0 2 517 6500 URL www dlink be Netherlands Weena 290 3012NJ Rotterdam Netherlands TEL 31 0 10 282 1445 FAX 31 0 10 282 1331 URL www dlink nl Norway Karihaugveien 89 N 1086 Oslo Norway TEL 47 99 300 100 FAX 47 22 30 90 85 URL www dlink no Poland Budynek Aurum ul Walic w 11 00 851 Warszawa Poland TEL 48 0 22 583 92 75 FAX 48 0 22 583 92 76 URL www dlink pl Portugal Rua Fernando Palha 50 Edificio Simol 1900 Lisbon Portugal TEL 351 21 8688493 FAX 351 21 8622492 URL www dlink es Romania B dul Unirii nr 55 bl E4A sc 2 et 4 ap 39 sector 3 Bucu
216. lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt 46 SNMP SNMP request SNMP request received Informational received with from lt ipAddress gt with invalid community invalid community string string Spanning Tree Spanning Tree Protocol Informational Protocol is enabled is enabled 51 Spanning Tree Spanning Tree Protocol Informational Protocol is disabled is disabled 124 Port security Port security is Port security violation Warning exceeded to its Port lt unitID maximum learning portNum gt MAC size and will not lt macaddr gt learn any new address 206 126 128 129 150 151 152 153 154 154 166 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual IP MAC PORT Binding IP and Password Changed Unauthenticated ip Unauthenticated IP Warning address and MAC address and discard by ip mac discarded by ip mac port binding port binding IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Port lt unitID portNum gt IP Address change Unit lt unitlD gt Informational activity Management IP address was changed by Username lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Password change Unit lt unitID gt Password Informational activity was changed by Username lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Broadcast storm Port lt unitID portNum gt Warning occurrence Broadcast storm is occurring
217. lysis Port Port 15 1000 eae ExDetfer god ogg Latecall roo Ext all BOO SingColl 500 Call 400 wore A ol 300 200 100 Unitipacketisec Time Interval i 5 Record Number 200 ShowHide i ExDefer M Late Coll M ExColl M SingGol M Coll M CRCError Figure 11 11 Tx Error Analysis window line graph To view the Transmitted Error Packets Table click the link View Table which will show the following table 176 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Packet Analysis of Fort Port 1 lis y ExDefer LateColl ExCaoll slg all Coll CRCError Figure 11 12 Tx Error Analysis window table The following fields may be set or viewed Parameter Description Time Interval 7s Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number 200 Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Counts the number of packets for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface was delayed because the medium was busy CRC Error Counts otherwise valid packets that did not end on a byte octet boundary LateColl Counts the number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet ExColl Excessive Collisions The number of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Sin
218. ministration gt Forwarding amp Filtering gt Multicast Filtering Mode Filtering Mode Apply torward_unregistered_groups Apply Multicast Filtermg Mode forward unregistered groups Figure 6 59 Configure Multicast Filtering Mode Select the desired Multicast Filtering Mode setting and click Apply to effect the change 74 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual SMTP Service SMTP or Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is a function of the Switch that will send switch events to mail recipients based on e mail addresses entered using the commands below The Switch is to be configured as a client of SMTP while the server is a remote device that will receive messages from the Switch place the appropriate information into an e mail and deliver 1t to recipients configured on the Switch This can benefit the Switch administrator by simplifying the management of small workgroups or wiring closets increasing the speed of handling emergency Switch events and enhancing security by recording questionable events occurring on the Switch The Switch plays four important roles as a client in the functioning of SMTP The server and server virtual port must be correctly configured for this function to work properly This is accomplished in the SMTP Service Settings window by properly configuring the SMTP Server Address and SMTP Server Port fields Mail recipients must be configured
219. n as link down in all windows and screens until the user recovers these ports 136 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Port Security A given ports or a range of ports dynamic MAC address learning can be locked such that the current source MAC addresses entered into the MAC address forwarding table can not be changed once the port lock is enabled The port can be locked by using the Admin State pull down menu to Enabled and clicking Apply Port Security is a security feature that prevents unauthorized computers with source MAC addresses unknown to the Switch prior to locking the port or ports from connecting to the Switch s locked ports and gaining access to the network To view the following window click Security gt Port Security Y Apply Permanent Max Learning Addr Lock Address Mode l Disabled l Delete On Timeout Disabled l Delete On Timeout Disabled 1 Delete On Timeout 4 Disabled l Delete nTime out 5 Disabled l Delete On Timeout E Disabled l Delete nTime out 7 Disabled l Delete On Timeout 5 Disabled l Delete On Timeout 3 Disabled l Delete On Timeout 10 Disabled l Delete On Timeout 11 Disabled l Delete On Timeout 12 Disabled l Delete On Timeout 13 Disabled l Delete nTime out 14 Disabled 1 Delete On Timeout 15 Disabled l Delete OnTime out 16 Disabled l Delete On Timeout i Disabled l Delete On Timeout 18 Disabled l Delete On Timeout 19 Disabled l D
220. nagement Information Base MIB which provides a standard presentation of the information controlled by the on board SNMP agent SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information over the network 18 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual The DES 3026 switch supports SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 You can specify which version of SNMP you want to use to monitor and control the Switch The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device In SNMP v 1 and v 2c user authentication is accomplished using community strings which function like passwords The remote user SNMP application and the Switch SNMP must use the same community string SNMP packets from any station that has not been authenticated are ignored dropped The default community strings for the Switch used for SNMP v 1 and v 2c management access are public Allows authorized management stations to retrieve MIB objects private Allows authorized management stations to retrieve and modify MIB objects SNMP v 3 uses a more sophisticated authentication process that is separated into two parts The first part is to maintain a list of users and their attributes that are allowed to act as SNMP managers The second part describes what each user on that list can do as an SNMP manager The Switch allows groups of u
221. nal through Console Username lt username gt There are no IP and MAC if login by console There are no IP and MAC if login by console Console session Unit lt unitID gt Console Informational timed out session timed out Username lt username gt 34 Web Successful login Successful login Informational through Web 205 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual through Web Username lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Login failed through Login failed through Warning Web Web Username lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt 36 Logout through Logout through Web Informational Web Username lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt 37 Web session timed Web session timed out Informational out Username lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Telnet Successful login Successful login Informational through Telnet through Telnet Username lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Login failed through Login failed through Warning Telnet Telnet Username lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Logout through Logout through Telnet Informational Telnet Username lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Telnet session Telnet session timed Informational timed out out Username lt username gt IP
222. nd nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated Notes about VLANs on the Switch No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLANs without a network device performing a routing function between the VLANs The Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLANs The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1Q tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag unaware The Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 1Q VLAN named default The default VLAN has a VID 1 The member ports of Port based VLANs may overlap if desired IEEE 802 1Q VLANs Some relevant terms Tagging The act of putting 802 1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header Ingress port A port on a switch where packets are flowing into the Switch and VLAN decisions must be made Egress port A port on a switch where packets are flowing out of the Switch either to another switch or to an end station and tagging decisions must be made IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLANs are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLANs require tagging w
223. nded that the highest priority queue Queue 3 be reserved for data packets with a priority value of 7 Packets that have not been given any priority value are placed in Queue 0 and thus given the lowest priority for delivery A weighted round robin system is employed on the Switch to determine the rate at which the queues are emptied of packets The ratio used for clearing the queues is 4 1 This means that the highest priority queue Queue 3 will clear 4 packets for every packet cleared from Queue 0 Remember the priority queue settings on the Switch are for all ports and all devices connected to the Switch will be affected This priority queuing system will be especially beneficial 1f your network employs switches with the capability of assigning priority tags 109 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual The Advantages of CoS CoS is an implementation of the IEEE 802 1p standard that allows network administrators a method of reserving bandwidth for important functions that require a large bandwidth or have a high priority such as VoIP voice over Internet Protocol web browsing applications file server applications or video conferencing Not only can a larger bandwidth be created but other less critical traffic can be limited so excessive bandwidth can be saved The Switch has separate hardware queues on every physical port to which packets from various applications can be mapped to and in
224. nononoonncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 80 DHACPBOO EP Relay Interlace SUM A A asa dacusladeanabene 80 DHCP Relay Option 00 Default SEAS A A A RA AS AT ti 81 DHCP Relay OPOROU SEMNE Siana sao isis 82 HC PRelay Opeon OL Dera Semi oS ld A A E E 83 DHCP Relay Opuon Gl Seti sarao E 83 EXPERT o a REO A O O PORA EE O A O A 85 VEAN DESIDIA ES A AAA AAA AAA AAA AA AE AAA AA A A ASADA 85 Notes about VLANS om the S WI ld a 85 IEEE SOUSTO VLANS A dia tle A AAA AA AAA A A A a 85 S02 TO WMEAN Ti AS A A A AE AAA AS A SS A A AE E 86 Ie A A II AN 87 Meres FINeCN E aa ti bo ddadeh a e scale tonlbedole Padeccalente e i Pea saupheie e a e a E a E a 87 Deru yV LANS a T E T E r E E E oO 88 VLAN SEMEN AO a EE E E A E E E E EE E E E E Ea 88 VLAN and Tronk GOS sxc co ota E A E R N tes oven A A N 88 SAE EAN E ME A a eT Ter atte a enter Meee ere ene en momen EM rT Mey Erte nt tare 89 Link ASE AAN ete silage lac acess cde aula lotsa idea 91 Understandins Port Tnk OODD esisi e AAA DA A AA AAA A AEA 91 VEAN EEK CN 9 aaa aa AAA ASA AAA AR AA ARA 93 ENKA SC A Ooae E NAE NO TE E EEO EEEE EO dated gauea eco uate EO ENA 94 EACP TOCS CE S ala E E E E E EE EEA 95 A A e o A niy ore merre 97 Static Router POLS SEUSS italia did 99 IOMP ACCESS CONOS CUNO S araea Ea A AA AA AAA 100 panama TE a 101 SODA Rapids Sammie Tres raid iii id 101 Port Tran HOMS 0711000 POE RR O O ORO 101 TA OU AAA aae ON 102 PZB Posta A A A 102 SOLID
225. nsmitted to this RADIUS authentication server PendingRequests The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent to this server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Accounting Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Accounting Response a timeout or a retransmission MalformedResponses The number of malformed RADIUS Accounting Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators and unknown types are not included as malformed accounting responses 188 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual BadAuthenticators The number of RADIUS Accounting Response packets which contained invalid authenticators received from this server UnknownTypes The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the accounting port port and dropped for some other reason PacketsDropped The number of RADIUS packets which were received from this server on the accounting Auth Diagnostics This table contains the diagnostic information regarding the operation of the Authenticator associated with each port An entry appears in this table for each port that supports the Authenticator function To view the Authenticator Diagnostics click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt Auth Diagnostics fi oe Click to activate and use this control
226. o prevent static damage discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of the electronic components such as the microprocessor You can do so by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface on the chassis You can also take the following steps to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge ESD 1 When unpacking a static sensitive component from its shipping carton do not remove the component from the antistatic packing material until you are ready to install the component in your system Just before unwrapping the antistatic packaging be sure to discharge static electricity from your body 2 When transporting a sensitive component first place it in an antistatic container or packaging 3 Handle all sensitive components in a static safe area If possible use antistatic floor pads workbench pads and an antistatic grounding strap xili DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Introduction Ethernet Technology Switch Description Features Ports Front Panel Components Side Panel Description Rear Panel Description Gigabit Combo Ports Ethernet Technology Fast Ethernet Technology The following manual describes the installation maintenance and configurations concerning members of the DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Switch group These switches are identical in configurations and very similar in basic hardware and consequentially most of the
227. oducto Asistencia T cnica de D Link por tel fono 34 902 30 45 45 0 067 min Lunes a Viernes de 9 00 a 14 00 y de 15 00 a 18 00 Web http www dlink es E mail soporte dlink es D Link Building Networks for People Supporto tecnico Gli ultimi aggiornamenti e la documentazione sono disponibili sul sito D Link Supporto Tecnico dal lunedi al venerdi dalle ore 9 00 alle ore 19 00 con orario continuato Telefono 199400057 Web http www dlink it support D Link Building Networks for People Technical Support You can find software updates and user documentation on the D Link website D Link provides free technical support for customers within Benelux for the duration of the warranty period on this product Benelux customers can contact D Link technical support through our website or by phone Netherlands 0900 501 2007 0 15ppm anytime Web www dlink nl Belgium 070 66 06 40 0 175ppm peak 0 0875ppm off peak Web www dlink be Luxemburg 32 70 66 06 40 Web www dlink be D Link Building Networks for People Pomoc techniczna Najnowsze wersje oprogramowania dokumentacji u ytkownika mo na znale w serwisie internetowym firmy D Link D Link zapewnia bezp atn pomoc techniczn klientom w Polsce w okresie gwarancyjnym produktu Klienci z Polski mog sie kontaktowa z dzia em pomocy technicznej firmy D Link za po rednictwem Internetu lub telefonicznie Telefonic
228. of D Link s products will not be applied to and does not cover any refurbished product and any product purchased through the inventory clearance or liquidation sale or other sales in which D Link the sellers or the liquidators expressly disclaim their warranty obligation pertaining to the product and in that case the product is being sold As ls without any warranty whatsoever including without limitation the Limited Warranty as described herein notwithstanding anything stated herein to the contrary Submitting A Claim The customer shall return the product to the original purchase point based on its return policy In case the return policy period has expired and the product is within warranty the customer shall submit a claim to D Link as outlined below e The customer must submit with the product as part of the claim a written description of the Hardware defect or Software nonconformance in sufficient detail to allow D Link to confirm the same along with proof of purchase of the product such as a copy of the dated purchase invoice for the product if the product is not registered e The customer must obtain a Case ID Number from D Link Technical Support at 1 877 453 5465 who will attempt to assist the customer in resolving any suspected defects with the product If the product is considered defective the customer must obtain a Return Material Authorization RMA number by completing the RMA form and entering the assigned Case ID Number at
229. of desktop computing applications are fueling the need for high performance networks A number of high speed LAN technologies are proposed to provide greater bandwidth and improve client server response times Among them Fast Ethernet or IOOBASE T provides a non disruptive smooth evolution from 10BASE T technology 100Mbps Fast Ethernet is a standard specified by the IEEE 802 3 LAN committee It is an extension of the 10Mbps Ethernet standard with the ability to transmit and receive data at 100Mbps while maintaining the Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection CSMA CD Ethernet protocol Gigabit Ethernet Technology Gigabit Ethernet is an extension of IEEE 802 3 Ethernet utilizing the same packet structure format and support for CSMA CD protocol full duplex flow control and management objects but with a tenfold increase in theoretical throughput over 100Mbps Fast Ethernet and a one hundred fold increase over 10Mbps Ethernet Since it is compatible with all 10Mbps and 100Mbps Ethernet environments Gigabit Ethernet provides a straightforward upgrade without wasting a company s existing investment in hardware software and trained personnel The increased speed and extra bandwidth offered by Gigabit Ethernet are essential to coping with the network bottlenecks that frequently develop as computers and their busses get faster and more users use applications that generate more traffic Upgrading key components such as your backbone
230. old Count 1 10 Forwarding BPDU Designated Root Bridge Root Priority Cost to Root Root Port Time Topology Change Sec Topology Changes Count Protocol Specification Max Age Hello Time Forward Delay Hold Time Mote Forward Dielay 1 gt Max Age Max Age Hello Time 1 Figure 7 17 STP Bridge Global Settings NOTE The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will occur Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Max Age lt 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Max Age 2 2 x Hello Time 1 second The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Spanning Tree Protocol Use the pull down menu to enable or disable STP globally on the Switch The default is Disabled 103 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Bridge Max Age The Max Age may be set to ensure that old information does not endlessly circulate 6 40 Sec through redundant paths in the network preventing the effective propagation of the new information Set by the Root Bridge this value will aid in determining that the Switch has spanning tree configuration values consistent with other devices on the bridged LAN If the value ages out and a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge the Switch will start sending its own BPDU to a
231. ollowing menu is used to restart the Switch If you do not save the settings all changes made in this session will be lost Do you want to save the settings Yes O No Figure 11 31 Reboot System window Clicking the Yes click box will instruct the Switch to save the current configuration to non volatile RAM before restarting the Switch Clicking the No click box instructs the Switch not to save the current configuration before restarting the Switch All of the configuration information entered from the last time Save Changes was executed will be lost Click the Restart button to restart the Switch Save Changes The Switch has two levels of memory normal RAM and non volatile or NV RAM Some settings require you to restart the Switch before they will take effect Restarting the Switch erases all settings in RAM and reloads the stored settings from the NV RAM Thus it is necessary to save all setting changes to NV RAM before rebooting the switch There are three Save Changes options e Save Config Saves current configuration to NV RAM This configuration will be loaded upon rebooting e Save Log Save history log e Save All Save configuration and log Save Config Saving all conficurations to NV RAM O Save Log Sawing all log information to NiV RAM O Save All Sawing all configurations and log information to MV EAM Figure 11 32 Save Changes screen 198 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 D
232. on gt Single IP Setting gt Configuration File Backup Restore D Fort MAC Address Model Name server IP Address 0 u Figure 6 54 Configuration File Backup Restore window Upload Log File The following window is used to upload log files from SIM member switches to a specified PC To upload a log file enter the IP address of the SIM member switch and then enter a path on your PC where you wish to save this file Click Upload to initiate the file transfer To view this window click Administration gt Single IP Setting gt Upload Log File 70 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual mo Port MAC Address Model Name server IP Address po o 0 oO Path Flename E Figure 6 55 Upload Log File window 71 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Forwarding amp Filtering Unicast Forwarding To view or configure the Unicast Forwarding window click Administration gt Forwarding amp Filtering gt Unicast Forwarding MAC Address Allow to go port a 00 00 00 00 00 00 Poti M MAC Address VID WLAN Name End of data Figure 6 56 Setup Static Unicast Forwarding Table and Static Unicast Forwarding Table window To add or edit an entry define the following parameters and then click Add Modify Pa
233. ooks to see if the other port Port 10 is a member of VLAN 2 and can therefore receive VLAN 2 packets If Port 10 is not a member of VLAN 2 then the packet will be dropped by the Switch and will not reach its destination If Port 10 is a member of VLAN 2 the packet will go through This selective forwarding feature based on VLAN criteria is how VLANs segment networks The key point being that Port will only transmit on VLAN 2 VLAN and Trunk Groups The members of a trunk group have the same VLAN setting Any VLAN setting on the members of a trunk group will apply to the other member ports 88 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Static VLAN Entry The Static VLAN Entry table allows the user to configure the Static VLAN entries for the switch To view this window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt Static VLAN Entry Total Entries 2 Add new 802 10 VLAN detault l 26 Modify _ RG 1 26 Modify Figure 7 4 802 1Q Static VLANs window The 802 1Q Static VLANs menu lists all previously configured VLANs by VLAN ID and VLAN Name To delete an existing 802 1Q VLAN click the corresponding x button under the Delete heading To edit an entry click the corresponding Modify button To create a new 802 1Q VLAN click the Add button in the 802 1Q Static VLANs menu A new menu will appear as shown below to configure the port settings and to assign a unique name and number to the new VLAN See
234. or option 61 then per IPIF configured servers will be ignored If the relay servers are not determined either by option 60 or option 61 then per IPIF configured servers will be used to determine the relay servers Drop When drop is specified the packet with no matching rules found will be dropped without further process Relay When relay is specified the packet will be processed further based on option 61 Click Apply to implement changes made To return to the DHCP Relay Option 61 Table click the Show DHCP Relay Option 61 Table link 84 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual L2 Features Static VLAN Entry VLAN Trunking Settings Trunking IGMP Snooping Spanning Tree Loopback Detection VLANs VLAN Description A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout VLANs can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLANs also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet although not necessarily VLANs can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location E
235. or viewed Parameter Description Time Interval 1s Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number 200 Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Bytes Counts the number of bytes successfully sent from the port Counts the number of packets successfully sent on the port Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a unicast address Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a multicast address Broadcast Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a broadcast address Show Hide Check whether or not to display Bytes and Packets Clear Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Line Chart Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table 173 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Packet Errors The Web Manager allows port error statistics compiled by the Switch s management agent to be viewed as either a line graph or a table Four windows are offered Received RX The table displays the error packets received on the Switch To view statistics for a specific port select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user ma
236. ormation Base Stores a device s management characteristics and parameters MIBs are used by the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP to contain attributes of their managed systems The Switch contains its own internal MIB multicast Single packets copied to a specific subset of network addresses These addresses are specified in the destination address field of the packet 210 protocol A set of rules for communication between devices on a network The rules dictate format timing sequencing and error control resilient link A pair of ports that can be configured so that one will take over data transmission should the other fail See also main port and standby port RJ 45 Standard 8 wire connectors for IEEE 802 3 10BASE T networks RMON Remote Monitoring A subset of SNMP MIB II that allows monitoring and management capabilities by addressing up to ten different groups of information RPS Redundant Power System A device that provides a backup source of power when connected to the Switch server farm A cluster of servers in a centralized location serving a large user population SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol A protocol which allows IP to run over a serial line connection SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol A protocol originally designed to be used in managing TCP IP internets SNMP is presently implemented on a wide range of computers and networking equipment and may be used to manage many aspects of network and end
237. orner of the SNMP Group Table page This will open the SNMP Group Table Configuration page as shown below Read View Name Write View Name Notify View Name security Model SSNMPy1 security Level Show All SHME Group Table Entries Figure 6 28 SNMP Group Table Configuration Add window The following parameters can set Parameter Description Group Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the new SNMP group of SNMP users Read View Name This name is used to specify the SNMP group created can request SNMP messages Write View Name Specify a SNMP group name for users that are allowed SNMP write privileges to the Switch s SNMP agent Notify View Name Specify a SNMP group name for users that can receive SNMP trap messages generated by the Switch s SNMP agent Security Model SNMPv1 Specifies that SNMP version 1 will be used SNMPv2 Specifies that SNMP version 2c will be used The SNMPv2 supports both centralized and distributed network management strategies It includes improvements in the Structure of Management Information SMI and adds some security features SNMPv3 Specifies that the SNMP version 3 will be used SNMPv3 provides secure access to devices through a combination of authentication and encrypting packets over the network Security Level The Security
238. ott 19 ott 602 lp priority otf Al ott 602 lp priority ott 21 otf Ue lp priority otf fe ott 602 lp priority ott 25 ott 602 lp priority otf 24 ott 602 lp priority ott Figure 8 7 Priority Setting 117 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Configure the following Priority Setting parameters Parameter Description From To Users may select a port or group of ports to assign ToS priority settings based on the following Main Select field Select the general priority settings for the ports previously stated using the pull down menu Priority option include none Choosing this option will clear the selected ports form having CoS priority settings port_priority Choosing this option will assign ports to map CoS priorities to individual ports 802 1p_priority Choosing this option will assign ports to map CoS priorities to 802 1p priorities MAC Base Choosing this option will assign ports to map CoS priorities to MAC addresses tos Choosing this option will assign ports to map CoS priorities to ToS priorities dscp Choosing this option will assign ports to map CoS priorities to DSCP priorities Click Apply to implement changes made TOS Priority Settings Use the TOS Priority Settings menu to configure ToS priority mapping for Class of Service on the Switch When a packet is received containing this ToS tag it will be mapped to the CoS queue configure
239. packets are flooding the network based on the threshold level provided by the user Once a packet storm has been detected the Switch will drop packets coming into the Switch until the storm has subsided This method can be utilized by selecting the Drop option of the Action field in the window below 133 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Traffic Trap None r From Broadcast Malbcai Urca Threshold Action Count Down Interval Apply Storm Storm Storm Port slo Disabled Y Disabled Disabled w 1128 Drop ws 5 Apply Threshold Kbit sec Port io Multicast Storm Storm Count A Down 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 5 2 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 E Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 rop 0 5 4 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 5 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 E Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 5 7 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 E Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 9 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 5 10 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 11 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 l2 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop j 5 13 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 14 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 l5 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 l Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 17 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 l Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 19 Disabled Di
240. packets received from DHCP servers the relay agent will drop invalid messages Disabled When the field is toggled to Disabled the relay agent will not check the validity of the packet s option 82 field This field can be toggled between Replace Drop and Keep by using the pull down menu It is used to set the Switches policy for handling packets when the DHCP Agent Information Option 82 Check is set to Disabled The default is Replace Replace The option 82 field will be replaced if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client Drop The packet will be dropped if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client Keep The option 82 field will be retained if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client Click Apply to implement any changes that have been made NOTE lf the Switch receives a packet that contains the option 82 field from a DHCP client and the information checking feature is enabled the switch drops the packet because it is invalid However in disable the information check feature so that the switch does not remove the option 82 field from the igi iy some instances you might configure a client with the option 82 field In this situation you should packet You can configure the action that the switch takes when it receives a packet with existing option 82 information by configuring the DHCP Agent Information Option 8
241. ping gt IGMP Access Control Settings From To Status Aly Poti Poti Disabled w Apply Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 7 16 IGMP Access Control Settings The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Enter a port or group of ports that may be configured for IGMP Access Control settings 1 A 4 4 5 6 E Y Status This function is used to Enable or Disable the IGMP Access Control Settings Click Apply to implement the new settings 100 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual NOTE To use IGMP Access Control the user must first configure the multicast filtering mode so that it can filter unregistered groups Spanning Tree This Switch supports two versions of the Spanning Tree Protocol 802 1D STP and 802 1w Rapid STP 802 1D STP will be familiar to most networking professionals However since 802 1w RSTP has been recently introduced to D Link managed Ethernet switches a brief introduction to the technology is provided below followed by a description of how to set up 802 1D STP and 802 1w RSTP 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree The Switch implements two versions of the Spanning Tree Protocol the Rapid Spanning T
242. ple screen above the User Account RG has been previously set using the User Accounts window in the Administration folder A User Account MUST be set in order to set the parameters for the SSH user To configure the parameters for a SSH user click on the hyperlinked User Name in the Current Accounts window which will reveal the following window to configure Confirm New Password Access Right Show All User Account Entries Figure 10 29 SSH User Configuration NOTE To set the SSH User Authentication parameters on the Switch a User Account must be previously configured Once a User Account has been configured return to the SSH User Authentication window which now displays the newly created account as shown here Note Maximum of entries Rts Password Figure 10 30 SSH User Authentication Mode window To configure the SSH settings for this user click its hyperlinked User Name which will display the following window to configure 163 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Auth Mode Password Y Hoton OS we Show All User Authentication Entries Figure 10 31 SSH User Authentication Edit window The user may set the following parameters Parameter Description Enter a User Name of no more than 15 characters to identify the SSH user This
243. pped in strict compliance with the foregoing requirements or for which an RMA number is not visible from the outside of the package The product owner agrees to pay D Link s reasonable handling and return shipping charges for any product that is not packaged and shipped in accordance with the foregoing requirements or that is determined by D Link not to be defective or non conforming What Is Not Covered This limited warranty provided by D Link does not cover Products that have been subjected to abuse accident alteration modification tampering negligence misuse faulty installation lack of reasonable care repair or service in any way that is not contemplated in the documentation for the product or if the model or serial number has been altered tampered with defaced or removed Initial installation installation and removal of the product for repair and shipping costs Operational adjustments covered in the operating manual for the product and normal maintenance Damage that occurs in shipment due to act of God failures due to power surge and cosmetic damage and Any hardware software firmware or other products or services provided by anyone other than D Link Disclaimer of Other Warranties EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY SPECIFIED HEREIN THE PRODUCT IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT I
244. printed Print Topology will print the topology map e Preference will set display properties such as polling interval and the views to open at SIM startup DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Group Add to group add a candidate to a group Clicking this option will reveal the following screen for the user to enter a password for authentication from the Candidate Switch before being added to the SIM group Click OK to enter the password or Cancel to exit the window Input password Password Java Applet Window Figure 6 51 Input password window Remove from Group remove an MS from the group Device Configure will open the web manager for the specific device View Refresh update the views with the latest status Topology display the Topology view Help About Will display the SIM information including the current SIM version Single IP Management 1 61 Copyright c 2004 D Link corporation Release Date 2005 07 14 Java Applet Window Figure 6 52 About window NOTE Upon this firmware release some functions of the SIM can only be configured through the Command Line Interface See the DES 30XX CLI Manual for more information on SIM and its configurations 69 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Firmware Upgrade This screen 1s used to upgrade firmware from the
245. r server 2 server 3 server 4 Figure 6 65 DHCP Relay Option 60 Default Settings window The following parameters may be configured or viewed Parameter Description Relay IP Address Enter the ip address that the Drop When drop is specified the packet with no matching rules found will be dropped without further process Relay When relay is specified the packet will be processed further based on option 61 The final relay servers will unite option 60 default relay servers and the relay servers determined by option 61 81 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual DHCP Relay Option 60 Settings This window allows the user to choose whether DHCP relay will process the DHCP option or not When Option 60 is enabled if the packet doesn t already have option 60 then the relay servers cannot be determined based on option 60 The relay servers will be determined based on either option 61 or IPIF configured servers If the relay servers are determined based on option 60 or option 61 then the IPIF configured servers will be ignored If the relay servers are not determined by option 60 or option 61 then the IPIF will be used to determine the relay servers To view this window click Administration gt DHCP BOOTP Relay gt DHCP Relay Option 60 Settings Add Clear All DHCP Relay Option 50 Table Total Entries 0 Figure 6 66 DHCP Relay Option 60 Settings window To
246. ra ai aE S E N E E E NEEE aE NENE A A E t 140 as on o eVe AAA AA E O E U O AE A E I EOE A E E 141 A 141 Lo A e OS 142 A A O dived taledawears wsuesnlessweanlvesuas 143 Understanding 802 1X Port based and MAC based Network Access Control coooooooooooonncccnonnnnnnonononnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnss 144 Porm Based Network Access COMO ASA A aaa 144 MAC Based NetWork Access CONO ant AA AAA A AAA AA a 145 SOZ IX Ate nt CAO sei NE a A SAA ETA AAA AR AAA AR 146 EEE O E E A A A O O O A ON 149 S02 De G21 os tol WE Se AI A cias 150 CUS VLAN Sl A A da 151 Limitado U sine tie Guest VEAN E A EN AAA AAA AN A iia 151 Comtioure SUAI Xx Guest VLAN ara at E A E A a e E AO 152 Initializing Rorts Tot Bort Bascd SU2 LA A AD AAA iS 153 Inttralimo Potts tor MAC Based 502 X tratada 154 Reauthenticate Ports tor Port Based 802 Lara a AAA AA ASAS AAN AS AAA AAA a 154 Reauthenticate Port s tor MAC based S02 1X iii A AAA AAA A AAN AAA A Aia 155 RADIUS Seras SS A A A OS 156 Tse FOS basses Serco thet ate eas raed ance eae Den as a ah eee asda Sune ona dar aatga ania poea ulate Sd lons aiacatea teeta oat Sade vac eet a deategt 157 MAIC Seo mentano APA Co on NE 158 SSC SS WSL SAI 159 SOE SEE VEr COM OU AC OM AAA PP taceala tab toi se neue Riataveat eel ceal aavieuceh dee tianevansebsegeatetertacctud abana verneses 160 Sou Authentication Mode and Alcorta Sto ca a a A E a E E S 161 SOE Sek AU Menta n Mode esrara A N A A 163 A O A ire E
247. raffic Control Settings Select the ports of this Switch to configure for Storm Control Broadcast Enables or disable Broadcast Storm Control Storm Multicast Strom Enables or disables Multicast Storm Control Unicast Storm Enables or disables Unknown Unicast storm control Threshold Specifies the number of broadcast multicast unicast packets in Kbps Kilo bit per seconds received by the Switch that will trigger the Traffic Control function to commence The configurable threshold range is from 64 1024000 with a default setting of 64 Action Select the method of traffic Control from the pull down menu The choices are Drop Utilizes the hardware Traffic Control mechanism which means the Switch s hardware will determine the Packet Storm based on the Threshold value stated and drop packets until the issue is resolved Shut Down Utilizes the Switch s software Traffic Control mechanism to determine the Packet Storm occurring Once detected the port will deny all incoming traffic to the port except STP BPDU packets which are essential in keeping the Spanning Tree operational on the Switch lf the Countdown timer has expired and yet the Packet Storm continues the port will be placed in Shutdown Forever mode and is no longer operational until the user manually resets the port using the Storm Control Recover setting at the top of this window Choosing this option obligates the user to configure the Interval setting as well which
248. rameter Description VLAN ID VID The VLAN ID number of the VLAN on which the above Unicast MAC address resides MAC Address The MAC address to which packets will be statically forwarded This must be a unicast MAC address Allows the selection of the port number on which the MAC address entered above resides Click Apply to implement the changes made Current entries can be found in the Static Unicast Forwarding Table as shown in the bottom half of the figure above To delete an entry in the Static Unicast Forwarding Table click the corresponding under the Delete heading 12 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Multicast Forwarding The following figure and table describes how to set up Multicast Forwarding on the Switch To view this window click Administration gt Forwarding amp Filtering gt Multicast Forwarding Total Entries 0 Add new Multicast Forwarding Settings MAC Address ype Todify Figure 6 57 Static Multicast Forwarding Settings and Current Multicast Forwarding Entries window The Static Multicast Forwarding Settings page displays all of the entries made into the Switch s static multicast forwarding table Click the Add button to open the Setup Static Multicast Forwarding Table as shown below A MAC az 00 00 00 00 00 00 TTD opo ojojo o o o ojojo ojojo o o o o ojojo ojojo ojo CAR AE TE DE AAA AE AE AE AE IE AE GE DE GE DE HE AE AE AE AE AI
249. ration broadcast A message sent to all destination devices on the network broadcast storm Multiple simultaneous broadcasts that typically absorb available network bandwidth and can cause network failure console port The port on the Switch accepting a terminal or modem connector It changes the parallel arrangement of data within computers to the serial form used on data transmission links This port is most often used for dedicated local management CSMA CD Channel access method used by Ethernet and IEEE 802 3 standards in which devices transmit only after finding the data channel clear for some period of time When two devices transmit simultaneously a collision occurs and the colliding devices delay their retransmissions for a random amount of time data center switching The point of aggregation within a corporate network where a switch provides high performance access to server farms a high speed backbone connection and a control point for network management and security Ethernet A LAN specification developed jointly by Xerox Intel and Digital Equipment Corporation Ethernet networks operate at 10Mbps using CSMA CD to run over cabling Fast Ethernet 100Mbps technology based on the Ethernet CD network access method Flow Control IEEE 802 3z A means of holding packets back at the transmit port of the connected end station Prevents packet loss at a congested switch port forwarding The process of sending a packet toward its destina
250. ree restricted 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 Included restricted 13612111 Included restricted 1 3 6 1 6 3 10 2 1 Included restricted 1 36 1 6 3 11 2 1 Included restricted 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 1 Included CommunityView 1 Inchided Community View 1 3 6 1 6 3 Excluded Community View 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 Included Figure 6 24 SNMP View Table To delete an existing SNMP View Table entry click the corresponding button in the Delete column To create a new entry click the Add button and a separate menu will appear View Name subtree OLD Included Show All SNMP View Table Entries Figure 6 25 SNMP View Table Configuration window Add The SNMP Group created with this table maps SNMP users identified in the SNMP User Table to the views created in the previous menu The following parameters can set Parameter Description View Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the new SNMP view being created Subtree OID Type the Object Identifier OID Subtree for the view The OID identifies an object tree MIB tree that will be included or excluded from access by an SNMP manager 49 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual View Type Select Included to include this object in the list of objects that an SNMP manager can access Select Excluded to exclude this object from the lis
251. ree Protocol RSTP as defined by the IEEE 802 1w specification and a version compatible with the IEEE 802 1D STP RSTP can operate with legacy equipment implementing IEEE 802 1D however the advantages of using RSTP will be lost The IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP evolved from the 802 1D STP standard RSTP was developed in order to overcome some limitations of STP that impede the function of some recent switching innovations in particular certain Layer 3 functions that are increasingly handled by Ethernet switches The basic function and much of the terminology is the same as STP Most of the settings configured for STP are also used for RSTP This section introduces some new Spanning Tree concepts and illustrates the main differences between the two protocols Port Transition States An essential difference between the two protocols is in the way ports transition to a forwarding state and in the way this transition relates to the role of the port forwarding or not forwarding in the topology RSTP combines the transition states disabled blocking and listening used in 802 1D and creates a single state Discarding In either case ports do not forward packets In the STP port transition states disabled blocking or listening or in the RSTP port state discarding there is no functional difference the port is not active in the network topology Table 6 2 below compares how the two protocols differ regarding the port state transition
252. requiring SSH 161 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual authentication techniques and the host computer is running the Linux operating system with a SSH program previously installed This field is Enabled by default Encryption Algorithm 3DES CBC Use the pull down to enable or disable the Triple Data Encryption Standard encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled Blow fish CBC Use the pull down to enable or disable the Blowfish encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled AES128 CBC Use the pull down to enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES128 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled AES192 CBC Use the pull down to enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES192 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled AES256 CBC Use the pull down to enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES 256 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled ARC4 Use the pull down to enable or disable the Arcfour encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled Cast128 CBC Use the pull down to enable or disable the Cast128 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled Twofish128 Use the pull down to enable or disable the twofish128 encryption algorithm The default is Enabled Twofish192
253. resti Romania TEL 40 0 21 320 23 05 FAX 40 0 21 320 23 07 URL www dlink eu 245 Spain Avenida Diagonal 593 95 9th floor 08014 Barcelona Spain TEL 34 93 409 07 70 FAX 34 93 491 07 95 URL www dlink es Sweden Gustavslundsvagen 151B S 167 51 Bromma Sweden TEL 46 0 8 564 619 00 FAX 46 0 8 564 619 01 URL www dlink se Switzerland Glatt Tower 2 0G Postfach CH 8301 Glattzentrum Switzerland TEL 41 0 1 832 11 00 FAX 41 0 1 832 11 01 URL www dlink ch Singapore 1 International Business Park 03 12 The Synergy Singapore 609917 TEL 65 6774 6233 FAX 65 6774 6322 URL www dlink intl com Australia 1 Giffnock Avenue North Ryde NSW 2113 Australia TEL 61 2 8899 1800 FAX 61 2 8899 1868 URL www dlink com au India D Link House Plot No 5 Kurla Bandra Complex Road Off CST Road Santacruz E Mumbai 400 098 India TEL 91 22 26526696 30616666 FAX 91 22 26528914 8476 URL www dlink co in Middle East Dubai P O Box 500376 Office 103 Building 3 Dubai Internet City Dubai United Arab Emirates TEL 971 4 3916480 FAX 971 4 3908881 URL www dlink me com Turkey Cayazaya Maslak Yolu S A Kat 5 Istanbul Turkey TEL 0212 289 5659 FAX 0212 289 7606 URL www dlink com tr Iran Unit 6 No 39 6th Alley Sanaei St Karimkhan Ave Tehran IRAN TEL 9821 8882 2613 FAX 9821 8883 5492 Pakistan Office 311 Business Avenue Main Shahrah e Faisal Kar
254. rnet IP and Packet Content Mask packet headers destined for the CPU and will either forward them or filter them based on the user s implementation As an added feature for the CPU Filtering the DES 3000 switch series allows the CPU filtering mechanism to be enabled or disabled globally permitting the user to create various lists of rules without immediately enabling them Creating an access profile for the CPU is divided into two basic parts The first is to specify which part or parts of a frame the Switch will examine such as the MAC source address or the IP destination address The second part is entering the criteria the Switch will use to determine what to do with the frame The entire process is described below CPU Interface Filtering State Settings In the following window the user may globally enable or disable the CPU Interface Filtering mechanism by using the pull down menu to change the running state Choose Enabled to enable CPU packets to be scrutinized by the Switch and Disabled to disallow this scrutiny To access this window click CPU Interface Filtering gt CPU Interface Filtering State Disabled Y Figure 9 1 CPU Interface Filtering State Settings window CPU Interface Filtering Table The CPU Interface Filtering Table displays the CPU Access Profile Table entries created on the Switch To view the configurations for an individual entry click the hyperlinked Profile ID number To view this t
255. rt 3 link up 100 Mbps FULL duplex Port 5 ink up 100 Mbps FULL duplex Figure 11 17 Switch History Log window The Switch can record event information in its own logs to designated SNMP trap receiving stations and to the PC connected to the console manager Clicking Clear will allow the user to clear the Switch History Log The information is described as follows Parameter Sequence Time Log Text Description A counter incremented whenever an entry to the Switch s history log is made The table displays the last entry highest sequence number first Displays the time in days hours and minutes since the Switch was last restarted Displays text describing the event that triggered the history log entry 182 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Log Settings Use the Log Settings menu to define the schedule or terms used for saving the Switch log To view this table click Monitoring gt Log Settings on_demand Apply Log Mode ON DEMAND Figure 11 18 Log Settings menu Select the desired Log Mode and click the Apply button to put into effect Parameter Description Use the pull down menu to select the desired method to save log files The user has three options on_demand Specifies that logs are saved when requested by the host receiving the log log_trigger Specifies that logs are saved wh
256. rut no hrut no lint 11 no lirat no birrat no birrat no lrrit 12 no hrut no hrut no hrut no lit 13 no lirt no hrrit no birrat no lrrit 14 no hrut no hrut no hrut no lint 15 no lirat no birrat no birrat no lirmt 16 no hrut no hrut no hrut no lint 1 no lirit no lirit no lirrit no lirit 18 no hrut no hrut no hrut no lit 15 no lirit no lint no lirrit no lirrit Al no hrut no hrut no hrut no lirt 21 no lirit no lirit no lirrit no lirit e no hrut no hrut no hrut no lint 2 no lint no limit no lirrit no lrnit 24 no hrut no hrut no hrut no lint 23 no lirit no ltnit no lirrit no lrnit Ab no hrut no hrut no hrut no lirt Note To perform precise bandwidth control itis required to enable the flow control to mutigate the retransimission of TCE trafic Figure 8 2 Bandwidth Settings and Port Bandwidth Table window 112 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual The following parameters can be set or are displayed Parameter Description From To A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port Type This drop down menu allows you to select between RX receive TX transmit and Both This setting will determine whether the bandwidth ceiling is applied to receiving transmitting or both receiving and transmitting packets No Limit This drop down menu allows you to specify that the selected port will have no bandwidth limit Enabled disables the limit This field
257. s Ports Delete Figure 6 33 IP MAC Binding Table menu The Address Binding Trap Log Settings field will enable and disable the sending of trap log messages for IP MAC binding When enabled the Switch will send a trap log message to the SNMP agent and the Switch log when an ARP packet is received that doesn t match the IP MAC binding configuration set on the Switch To modify either the IP address or the MAC address of the binding entry make the desired changes in the appropriate field and Click Modify To find an IP MAC binding entry enter the IP and MAC addresses and click Find To delete an entry click Delete To clear all the entries from the table click Delete All 57 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual IP MAC Binding Blocked To view unauthorized devices that have been blocked by IP MAC binding restrictions open the IP MAC Binding Blocked window shown below To view this table click Administration gt IP MAC Binding gt IP MAC Binding Blocked EEN 00 00 00 00 00 00 Total Entries 0 VID VLAN Name MAC Address Figure 6 34 IP MAC Binding Blocked window To find an unauthorized device that has been blocked by the IP MAC binding restrictions enter the VLAN name and MAC Address in the appropriate fields and click Find To delete an entry click the next to the entry s MAC address To delete all the entries in the IP
258. s a member of the SIM group A SIM group can only have one Commander Switch CS All switches in a particular SIM group must be in the same IP subnet broadcast domain Members of a SIM group cannot cross a router A SIM group accepts up to 33 switches numbered 0 32 including the Commander Switch numbered 0 There is no limit to the number of SIM groups in the same IP subnet broadcast domain however a single switch can only belong to one group If multiple VLANSs are configured the SIM group will only utilize the default VLAN on any switch SIM allows intermediate devices that do not support SIM This enables the user to manage switches that are more than one hop away from the CS The SIM group is a group of switches that are managed as a single entity SIM switches may take on three different roles 1 Commander Switch CS This is a switch that has been manually configured as the controlling device for a group and takes on the following characteristics e It has an IP Address e It is not a commander switch or member switch of another Single IP group e It is connected to the member switches through its management VLAN 2 Member Switch MS This is a switch that has joined a single IP group and is accessible from the CS and it takes on the following characteristics e Itis not a CS or MS of another Single IP group e Itis connected to the CS through the CS management VLAN 3 Candidate Switch CaS This i
259. s a switch that 1s ready to join a SIM group but is not yet a member of the SIM group The Candidate Switch may join the SIM group of a switch by manually configuring it to be a MS of a SIM group A switch configured as a CaS is not a member of a SIM group and will take on the following characteristics e Itis not a CS or MS of another Single IP group e Itis connected to the CS through the CS management VLAN After configuring one switch to operate as the CS of a SIM group additional switches may join the group through a direct connection to the Commander switch Only the Commander switch will allow entry to the candidate switch enabled for SIM The CS will then serve as the in band entry point for access to the MS The CS s IP address will become the path to all MS s of the group and the CS s Administrator s password and or authentication will control access to all MS s of the SIM group With SIM enabled the applications in the CS will redirect the packet instead of executing the packets The applications will decode the packet from the administrator modify some data then send it to the MS After 59 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual execution the CS may receive a response packet from the MS which it will encode and send it back to the administrator When a CaS becomes an MS 1t automatically becomes a member of the first SNMP community include read write and read only to which the CS be
260. s of the relay agent if the relay agent is configured to the packet Once the option 82 information has been added to the packet it is sent on to the DHCP server When the DHCP server receives the packet if the server is capable of option 82 it can implement policies like restricting the number of IP addresses that can be assigned to a single remote ID or circuit ID Then the DHCP server echoes the option 82 field in the DHCP reply The DHCP server unicasts the reply to the back to the relay agent if the request was relayed to the server by the relay agent The switch verifies that it originally inserted the option 82 data Finally the relay agent removes the option 82 field and forwards the packet to the switch port that connects to the DHCP client that sent the DHCP request Disabled If the field is toggled to Disabled the relay agent will not insert and remove DHCP relay information option 82 field in messages between DHCP servers and clients and the check and policy settings will have no effect This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu It is used to enable or disable the Switches ability to check the validity of the packet s option 82 field Enabled When the field is toggled to Enable the relay agent will check the validity of the packet s option 82 field If the switch receives a packet that contains the option 82 field from a DHCP client the switch drops the packet because it is invalid In
261. s on TFTP during a firmware download event This includes in process invalid file violation file not found complete and time out messages from the TFTP server When a system reset occurs on the Switch Information within the e mail from the SMTP server regarding switch events includes The source device name and IP address A timestamp denoting the identity of the SMTP server and the client that sent the message as well as the time and date of the message received from the Switch Messages that have been relayed will have timestamps for each relay The event that occurred on the Switch prompting the e mail message to be sent When an event is processed by a user such as save or firmware upgrade the IP address MAC address and User Name of the user completing the task will be sent along with the system message of the event occurred When the same event occurs more than once the second mail message and every repeating mail message following will have the system s error message placed in the subject line of the mail message The following details events occurring during the Delivery Process Urgent mail will have high priority and be immediately dispatched to recipients while normal mail will be placed in a queue for future transmission 75 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual e The maximum number of untransmitted mail messages placed in the queue cannot exceed 30 messages Any ne
262. s to pay D Link s reasonable handling and return shipping charges for any product that is not packaged and shipped in accordance with the foregoing requirements or that is determined by D Link not to be defective or non conforming What Is Not Covered The Limited Warranty provided herein by D Link does not cover Products that in D Link s judgment have been subjected to abuse accident alteration modification tampering negligence misuse faulty installation lack of reasonable care repair or service in any way that is not contemplated in the documentation for the product or if the model or serial number has been altered tampered with defaced or removed Initial installation installation and removal of the product for repair and shipping costs Operational adjustments covered in the operating manual for the product and normal maintenance Damage that occurs in shipment due to act of God failures due to power surge and cosmetic damage Any hardware software firmware or other products or services provided by anyone other than D Link and Products that have been purchased from inventory clearance or liquidation sales or other sales in which D Link the sellers or the liquidators expressly disclaim their warranty obligation pertaining to the product While necessary maintenance or repairs on your Product can be performed by any company we recommend that you use only an Authorized D Link Service Office Improper or incorrectly performed maint
263. sabled Disabled 64 Drop j 5 20 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 21 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 22 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 23 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 24 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 25 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 26 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 5 Figure 10 1 Traffic Control Settings window The Switch will also scan and monitor packets coming into the Switch by monitoring the Switch s chip counter This method is only viable for Broadcast and Multicast storms because the chip only has counters for these two types of packets Once a storm has been detected that is once the packet threshold set below has been exceeded the Switch will shutdown the port to all incoming traffic with the exception of STP BPDU packets for a time period specified using the Count Down field Although the Count Down field can be specified users are advised to disable this feature and assess the situation before recovering the port The Count Down field may be disabled by entering a value of O zero If this field times out and the packet storm continues the port will be placed in a Shutdown Forever mode which will produce a warning message to be sent to the Trap Receiver Once in Shutdown Forever mode the user may recover the affected ports by using the Traffic Control Recover section of the previous window and recover the ports shutdown forever To utilize this method of Storm Control choo
264. se the Shutdown option of the Action field in the window below Use the Traffic Control menu to enable or disable storm control and adjust the threshold for multicast and broadcast storms as well as any unknown storms To view the window above click Security gt Traffic Control To configure Traffic Control enable or disable the Broadcast Storm Multicast Storm and Unknown Unicast Storm using their corresponding pull down menus Click Apply to implement changes made 134 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Parameter Description Traffic Control Recover Select the ports to be recovered from being Shutdown Forever by the shutdown action of this feature Traffic Trap Configuration Traffic Trap Enable sending of Storm Trap messages when the type of action taken by the Traffic Control function in handling a Traffic Storm is one of the following None Will send no Storm trap warning messages regardless of action taken by the Traffic Control mechanism Storm Occurred Will send Storm Trap warning messages upon the occurrence of a Traffic Storm only Storm Cleared Will send Storm Trap messages when a Traffic Storm has been cleared by the Switch only Both Will send Storm Trap messages when a Traffic Storm has been both detected and cleared by the Switch This function cannot be implemented in the Hardware mode When Drop is chosen in the Action field T
265. sers to be listed and configured with a shared set of privileges The SNMP version may also be set for a listed group of SNMP managers Thus you may create a group of SNMP managers that are allowed to view read only information or receive traps using SNMP v 1 while assigning a higher level of security to another group granting read write privileges using SNMP v 3 Using SNMP v 3 individual users or groups of SNMP managers can be allowed to perform or be restricted from performing specific SNMP management functions The functions allowed or restricted are defined using the Object Identifier OID associated with a specific MIB An additional layer of security is available for SNMP v 3 in that SNMP messages may be encrypted To read more about how to configure SNMP v 3 settings for the Switch read the section entitled Management Traps Traps are messages that alert network personnel of events that occur on the Switch The events can be as serious as a reboot someone accidentally turned OFF the Switch or less serious like a port status change The Switch generates traps and sends them to the trap recipient or network manager Typical traps include trap messages for Authentication Failure Topology Change and New Root MIBs Management and counter information are stored by the Switch in the Management Information Base MIB The Switch uses the standard MIB II Management Information Base module Consequently values for MIB objects can be retrieved
266. splays the percentage of the total available bandwidth being used on the port To view the port utilization click Monitoring gt Port Utilization Clear Utilization Port Port 1 100 Utilization 0 910 Unit Time Interval 15 Record Number Show Hide if Utilization Figure 11 2 Port Utilization window The user may use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page to view utilization statistics per port by clicking on a port The following field can be set 166 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Parameter Description Time Interval Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Click Clear to refresh the graph Click Apply to implement changes made 167 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Packets The Web Manager allows various packet statistics to be viewed as either a line graph or a table Six windows are offered Received RX This table is used to view the graph of packets received on the Switch To select a port to view these Statistics for use the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this windo
267. switch functions will be open to the client If the authenticator does not have target VLAN placement information the client will be returned to its originating VLAN Yet if the client is denied authentication by the authenticator it will be placed in the Guest VLAN where it has limited rights and access The adjacent figure should give the user a better understanding of the Guest VLAN process Limitations Using the Guest VLAN ENABLE GUEST VLAN Authentication 802 1 Accepted Authentication Process VLAN Identification Process by Authenticator Authentication Denied fi A f A i Identified VLAN Unidentified VLAN A _ a _ _ e a Sas a pr Fl ClientPlacedin 1 ClientPlaced in Client Returnedto Guest VLAN VLAN Specified by Originating VLAN A Authenticator F i e _ a la a _ li _ a par r Figure 10 16 Guest VLAN Authentication Process 1 Ports supporting Guest VLANs cannot be GVRP enabled and vice versa oe 151 A port cannot be a member of a Guest VLAN and a static VLAN simultaneously Once a client has been accepted into the target VLAN 1t can no longer access the Guest VLAN If a port is a member of multiple VLANs it cannot become a member of the Guest VLAN DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Configure 802 1X Guest VLAN To set a Guest 802 1X VLAN the user must first configure
268. t Content adjust the following parameters and click Apply Parameters Description Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Selected profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IP address or Packet Content Ethernet instructs the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header IP instructs the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Packet Content Mask instructs the Switch to examine the packet header This field will instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified value 0 15 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from the beginning of the packet to the 15th byte value 16 31 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte 31 131 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual value 32 47 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte 47 value 48 63 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte value 64 79 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to byte 79 The Access Rule may be configured on a per port basis by entering the port number of the Switch into this field Entering
269. t Ethernet Switch Command Line Interface Firmware Build 4 20 027 Copyright C 2008 D Link Corporation All rights reserved UserName PassWord DES 3026 4 config ipif System ipaddress 10 73 21 42 255 0 0 0 Command congig ipif System ipaddress 10 73 21 42 8 Success DES 3026 4 Figure 4 6 Assigning the Switch an IP Address In the above example the Switch was assigned an IP address of 10 7 3 21 with a subnet mask of 255 0 0 0 The system message Success indicates that the command was executed successfully The Switch can now be configured and managed via Telnet and the CLI or via the Web based management Connecting Devices to the Switch After you assign IP addresses to the Switch you can connect devices to the Switch To connect a device to an SFP transceiver port e Use your cabling requirements to select an appropriate SFP transceiver type Insert the SFP transceiver sold separately into the SFP transceiver slot Use the appropriate network cabling to connect a device to the connectors on the SFP transceiver NOTICE When the SFP transceiver acquires a link the associated 5 integrated 10 100 1000BASE T port is disabled 21 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Introduction to Web based Switch Configuration Introduction Logging on to the Web Manager Web Based User Interface Basic Setup Reboot Basic Switch Setup Network Management Switch Utilities
270. t of objects that an SNMP manager can access To implement your new settings click Apply To return to the SNMP View Table click the Show All SNMP View Table Entries link SNMP Group Table An SNMP Group created with this table maps SNMP users identified in the SNMP User Table to the views created in the previous menu To view the SNMP Group Table click Administration gt SNMP Manager gt SNMP Group Table Aga Total Entries 9 Note Itis allowed insert 30 entries into the table only security Model Security Level SN LAP y 1 Houh oPriv SNMP A No Auth oPriv Sie ws Nos uhNoPrer oI LAP y 1 No Auth oPriv SN Mew Houh oPror oI RAP y 1 NoAuthhoPriv SM Mew Nos uhNoPrer oI LAP y 1 No Auth oPriv SMe we Houh oPror X X X X X X X Figure 6 26 SNMP Group Table To delete an existing SNMP Group Table entry click the corresponding under the Delete heading To display the current settings for an existing SNMP Group Table entry click the hyperlink for the entry under the Group Name Group Name public Read View Name Community View Write View Name Notify View Name Corea View security Model SIMP security Level No4uhHNoPre Show All SNMP Group Table Entries Figure 6 27 SNMP Group Table Display View window 50 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual To add a new entry to the Switch s SNMP Group Table click the Add button in the upper left hand c
271. the back as shown in the following figure At the back of the slot 1s a plug that must be connected to the module Gently but firmly push in on the module to secure 1t to the Switch The module should fit snugly into the corresponding receptor Figure 2 10 Inserting the optional module into the Switch The upgraded DES 3018 DES 3026 are now ready for use 11 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Connecting the Switch Switch To End Node Switch to Hub or Switch Connecting To Network Backbone or Server NOTE All high performance N Way Ethernet ports can support both MDI Il and MDI X connections Switch to End Node End nodes include PCs outfitted with a 10 100 or 1000 Mbps RJ 45 Ethernet Network Interface Card NIC and most routers An end node can be connected to the Switch via a twisted pair UTP STP cable The end node should be connected to any of the 10 100BASE T ports of the Switch DES 3018 10 100 Fast Ethernet Switch O O Console E D Link RJ 45 Connector Figure 3 1 Switch connected to an end node The Link Act LEDs for each UTP port will light green or amber when the link is valid A blinking LED indicates packet activity on that port 12 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Switch to Hub or Switch These connections can be accomplished in a number of ways using a normal cable e A 10B
272. the table below for a description of the parameters in the new menu PR A TEM ROBO DOE r we e A E el A e A A A eee ee eee e A None 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Egress LAE AE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE 0 JE 0 JE JE JE JE show All Static VLAN Entries Figure 7 5 802 1Q Static VLANs Add To return to the Current 802 10 Static VLANs Entries window click the Show All Static VLAN Entries link To change an existing 802 1Q VLAN entry click the Modify button of the corresponding entry you wish to modify A new menu will appear to configure the port settings and to assign a unique name and number to the new VLAN See the table below for a description of the parameters in the new menu 89 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Por Stings 12 34 5 6178 9 0 M2 19 14115 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 2 aaa ON UE BU OE E OE OE ON IE OE SE OE IE E AE E E E a None LILJE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE 0 0 JE Egress 0 9 0 90 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Show All Static VLAN Entries Figure 7 6 802 1Q Static VLANs Modify The following fields can then be set in either the Add or Modify 802 1Q Static VLANs menus Parameter Description Allo
273. the user to set the connection timeout The use may set a time between 120 and 600 120 600 seconds The default setting is 120 seconds Auth Fail 2 20 Allows the Administrator to set the maximum number of attempts that a user may try to log on to the SSH Server utilizing the SSH authentication After the maximum number of attempts has been exceeded the Switch will be disconnected and the user must reconnect to the Switch to attempt another login The number of maximum attempts may be set between 2 and 20 The default setting is 2 Session Rekeying This field is used to set the time period that the Switch will change the security shell encryptions by using the pull down menu The available options are Never 10 min 30 min and 60 min The default setting is Never Listened Port Enter the virtual port number to be used with this feature The common port number for SSH Number is 22 160 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual SSH Authentication Mode and Algorithm Settings The SSH Authentication window allows the configuration of the desired types of SSH algorithms used for authentication encryption There are three categories of algorithms listed and specific algorithms of each may be enabled or disabled by using their corresponding pull down menus All algorithms are enabled by default To open the following window click Security gt SSH gt SSH Authentication Mode and Algorithm Sett
274. tia deste produto Assist ncia T cnica da D Link na Internet Web http www dlink pt E mail soporte dlink es D Link Building Networks for People Texvikhn YTrooTnpi n Mtropeite va Bpe te software updates Kal TANPOMOPIES yia TN YPNON Twv TIPOIOVTWV OTIC IOTOCEA L0EC TNG D Link H D Link Trpoow pel OTOUG TTEAGTES TNG OWPEAV UTTOOTNPICEN oTov EMAG IK XWPO MTTOpe TE VA ETTIKOIVWVEITE JE TO TUNUG TEXVIKAC UTTOOT PIENS UEOW TNG IOTOOE AG N UEOW THAEMWVOU D Link Hellas Support Center KepalAnv acs 64 11251 A nva TnA 210 86 11 114 Aeut pa Mapackeun 09 00 17 00 Pag 210 8611114 Web http www dlink gr support D Link Building Networks for People Tehnicka podrska Hvala vam na odabiru D Link proizvoda Za dodatne informacije podr ku i upute za kori tenje ure aja molimo vas da posjetite D Link internetsku stranicu na www dlink eu Web www dlink biz hr D Link Building Networks for People Tehnicna podpora Zahvaljujemo se vam ker ste izbrali D Link proizvod Za vse nadaljnje informacije podporo ter navodila za uporabo prosimo obiscite D Link ovo spletno stran www dlink eu Web www dlink biz sl D Link Building Networks for People Suport tehnica Va multumim pentru alegerea produselor D Link Pentru mai multe informatii suport si manuale ale produselor va rugam sa vizitati site ul D Link www dlink eu Web www dlink ro D Link Building Networks for People
275. tied before any other packet is forwarded This results in the end user receiving all packets sent as quickly as possible thus prioritizing the queue and allowing for an uninterrupted stream of packets which optimizes the use of bandwidth available for the video conference 110 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Understanding CoS The DES 3000 series switch supports 802 1p priority queuing The DES 3000 series has 4 priority classes of service These priority classes of service are numbered from 3 Class 3 the highest priority class of service to O Class 0 the lowest priority class of service The eight priority queues specified in IEEE 802 1p p0 to p7 are mapped to the Switch s priority classes of service as follows e Priority 0 is assigned to the Switch s Q1 class e Priority is assigned to the Switch s QO class e Priority 2 is assigned to the Switch s QO class e Priority 3 is assigned to the Switch s Q1 class e Priority 4 is assigned to the Switch s Q2 class e Priority 5 is assigned to the Switch s Q2 class e Priority 6 is assigned to the Switch s Q3 class e Priority 7 is assigned to the Switch s Q3 class Priority scheduling is implemented using two types of methods strict priority and round robin priority If no changes are made to the CoS priority scheduling settings the method used is strict priority For strict priority based scheduling p
276. tion by an internetworking device full duplex A system that allows packets to be transmitted and received at the same time and in effect doubles the potential throughput of a link half duplex A system that allows packets to be transmitted and received but not at the same time Contrast with full duplex IP address Internet Protocol address A unique identifier for a device attached to a network using TCP IP The address is written as four octets separated with full stops periods and is made up of a network section an optional subnet section and a host section IPX Internetwork Packet Exchange A protocol allowing communication in a NetWare network LAN Local Area Network A network of connected computing resources such as PCs printers servers covering a relatively small geographic area usually not larger than a floor or building Characterized by high data rates and low error rates latency The delay between the time a device receives a packet and the time the packet is forwarded out of the destination port line speed See baud rate main port The port in a resilient link that carries data traffic in normal operating conditions MDI Medium Dependent Interface An Ethernet port connection where the transmitter of one device is connected to the receiver of another device MDI X Medium Dependent Interface Cross over An Ethernet port connection where the internal transmit and receive lines are crossed MIB Management Inf
277. tly to the DHCP BOOTP server using the following window Properly configured settings will be displayed in the DHCP BOOTP Relay Interface Table at the bottom of the following window The user may add up to four server IP s per IP interface on the Switch To enable and configure DHCP BOOTP Relay Global Settings on the Switch click Administration gt DHCP BOOTP Relay gt DHCP BOOTP Relay Interface Settings DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Interface y 0000 Add Interface Server l server 2 server 3 server 4 Figure 6 64 DHCP BOOTP Relay Interface Settings and DHCP BOOTP Relay Interface Table window The following parameters may be configured or viewed Parameter Description The IP interface on the Switch that will be connected directly to the Server Server IP Enter the IP address of the DHCP BOOTP server Up to four server IPs can be configured per IP Interface DHCP Relay Option 60 Default Settings This function allows the user to set up the DHCP Relay Option 60 Default Settings When there are no servers found that are suitable for the packet based on option 60 the relay servers will be determined by the default relay server setting To view this window click Administration gt DHCP BOOTP Relay gt DHCP Relay Option 60 Default Settings 0 0 0 0 Drop M serve
278. to initiate the file transfer To view this window click Administration gt TFTP Services Download Firryare 0 0 0 0 File Name Figure 6 18 TFTP Services screen Ping Test Ping is a small program that sends ICMP Echo packets to the IP address you specify The destination node then responds to or echoes the packets sent from the Switch This is very useful to verify connectivity between the Switch and other nodes on the network To view this window click Administration gt Ping Test Target IP Address Repeat Pingine for Infinite times O times 1 255 Time ut ao seconds 1 9 F Figure 6 19 Ping Test The user may use Infinite times radio button in the Repeat Pinging for field which will tell the ping program to keep sending ICMP Echo packets to the specified IP address until the program is stopped The user may opt to choose a specific number of times to ping the Target IP Address by clicking its radio button and entering a number between 1 and 255 The user can also choose a Time Out for the ping which will terminate the ping request if no response packet has returned to the Switch in the allotted time Click Start to initiate the Ping program 45 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual SNMP Manager SNMP Settings Simple Network Management Protocol
279. turn prioritized View the following map to see how the Switch implements basic 802 1p priority queuing Implementation of CoS 802 1p Priority Tagging Cos Cos Class 0 Class 3 Cos CoS Class 1 Class 2 Cos Priority Tags Packets without CoS tags will be forwarded to the CoS class based on the CoS 802 1p default priority Incoming packets tagged with the CoS priorities 0 7 will be forwarded to the CoS Class as shown above DES 3018 D Link Figure 8 1 An Example of the Default CoS Mapping on the Switch The picture above shows the default priority setting for the Switch Class 3 has the highest priority of the four priority classes of service on the Switch In order to implement CoS the user is required to instruct the Switch to examine the header of a packet to see if it has the proper identifying tag Then the user may forward these tagged packets to designated classes of service on the Switch where they will be emptied based on priority For example if a user wishes to have a video conference between two remotely set computers The administrator can add priority tags to the video packets being sent out utilizing the Access Profile commands Then on the receiving end the administrator instructs the Switch to examine packets for this tag acquires the tagged packets and maps them to a class queue on the Switch Then in turn the administrator will set a priority for this queue so that will be emp
280. u are not sure of the type of power source required consult your service provider or local power company e To help avoid damaging your system be sure the voltage selection switch if provided on the power supply is set to match the power available at your location 115 volts V 60 hertz Hz in most of North and South America and some Far Eastern countries such as South Korea and Taiwan 100 V 50 Hz in eastern Japan and 100 V 60 Hz in western Japan 230 V 50 Hz in most of Europe the Middle East and the Far East e Also be sure that attached devices are electrically rated to operate with the power available in your location e Use only approved power cable s If you have not been provided with a power cable for your system or for any AC powered option intended for your system purchase a power cable that is approved for use in your country The power cable must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product s electrical ratings label The voltage and current rating of the cable should be greater than the ratings marked on the product e To help prevent electric shock plug the system and peripheral power cables into properly grounded electrical outlets These cables are equipped with three prong plugs to help ensure proper grounding Do not use adapter plugs or remove the grounding prong from a cable If you must use an extension cable use a 3 wire cable with properly grounded plugs Xi DES 3010F DES
281. ult community strings for the Switch used for SNMP v 1 and v 2 management access are public Allows authorized management stations to retrieve MIB objects private Allows authorized management stations to retrieve and modify MIB objects SNMPv3 uses a more sophisticated authentication process that is separated into two parts The first part is to maintain a list of users and their attributes that are allowed to act as SNMP managers The second part describes what each user on that list can do as an SNMP manager The Switch allows groups of users to be listed and configured with a shared set of privileges The SNMP version may also be set for a listed group of SNMP managers Thus you may create a group of SNMP managers that are allowed to view read only information or receive traps using SNMPv1 while assigning a higher level of security to another group granting read write privileges using SNMPv3 Using SNMPv3 individual users or groups of SNMP managers can be allowed to perform or be restricted from performing specific SNMP management functions The functions allowed or restricted are defined using the Object Identifier OID associated with a specific MIB An additional layer of security is available for SNMPv3 in that SNMP messages may be encrypted To read more about how to configure SNMPv3 settings for the Switch read the next section MIBs Management and counter information are stored by the Switch in the Management Information Base MIB
282. user must pass the authentication process to gain access to the network None The port will not be controlled by the 802 1X function 150 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Guest VLANs On 802 1X security enabled networks there is a need for non 802 1X supported devices to gain limited access to the network due to lack of the proper 802 1X software or incompatible devices such as computers running Windows 98 or lower operating systems or the need for guests to gain access to the network without full authorization or local authentication on the Switch To supplement these circumstances this switch now implements 802 1X Guest VLANs These VLANs should have limited access rights and features separate from other VLANs on the network To implement 802 1X Guest VLANs the user must first create a VLAN on the network with limited rights and then enable it as an 802 1X guest VLAN Then the administrator must configure the guest accounts accessing the Switch to be placed in a Guest VLAN when trying to access the Switch Upon initial entry to the Switch the client wishing services on the Switch will need to be authenticated by a remote RADIUS Server or local authentication on the Switch to be placed in a fully operational VLAN If authenticated and the authenticator possesses the VLAN placement information that client will be accepted into the fully operational target VLAN and normal
283. ve and follow service markings Do not service any product except as explained in your system documentation Opening or removing covers that are marked with the triangular symbol with a lightning bolt may expose you to electrical shock Only a trained service technician should service components inside these compartments e If any of the following conditions occur unplug the product from the electrical outlet and replace the part or contact your trained service provider The power cable extension cable or plug is damaged An object has fallen into the product The product has been exposed to water The product has been dropped or damaged The product does not operate correctly when you follow the operating instructions e Keep your system away from radiators and heat sources Also do not block cooling vents e Do not spill food or liquids on your system components and never operate the product in a wet environment If the system gets wet see the appropriate section in your troubleshooting guide or contact your trained service provider e Do not push any objects into the openings of your system Doing so can cause fire or electric shock by shorting out interior components e Use the product only with approved equipment e Allow the product to cool before removing covers or touching internal components e Operate the product only from the type of external power source indicated on the electrical ratings label If yo
284. vel account on the DES 3026 with the user name newmanager The commands for creating a new administrator level account are identical for the DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 and DES 3018 switch models DES 3026 4fcreate account admin newmanager Command create account admin newmanager Enter a case sensitive new password Enter the new password again for confirmation Success DES 3026 4 Figure 4 4 Creating a new Administrator level account NOTICE CLI configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not saved when the Switch is rebooted To save all your configuration changes in nonvolatile storage you must use the 5 save command to copy the running configuration file to the startup configuration SNMP Settings Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an OSI Layer 7 Application Layer designed specifically for managing and monitoring network devices SNMP enables network management stations to read and modify the settings of gateways routers switches and other network devices Use SNMP to configure system features for proper operation monitor performance and detect potential problems in the Switch switch group or network Managed devices that support SNMP include software referred to as an agent which runs locally on the device A defined set of variables managed objects is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device These objects are defined in a Ma
285. w click Monitoring gt Packets gt Received RX Port Cleat eau ele Rx Packets Analysis Port Bytes Packets 134 E 1000fpacketsech Time Interval 15 Record Mumber 00 ShowHide W Bytes W Packets Figure 11 3 Rx Packets Analysis window line graph for Bytes and Packets To view the Received Packets Table click the link View Table which will show the following table 168 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual View Line hart Packet Analysis of Port Port 7 lis y Rx Packets PAIESE Bytes 3118895207 7901 Packets 5351003 102 Rx Packets Rate sec Unicast Multicast 44629574 Broadcast 6027233 Tx Packets Rate sec Bytes Fackets Figure 11 4 Rx Packets Analysis Table The following fields may be set or viewed Parameter Description Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second 169 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual UMB Cast RX The following graph displays the Unicast Multicast and Broadcast packets received on the Switch To select a port to view these statistics for use the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this graph click Monitoring gt Packets gt UMB Cast RX Port y Clear
286. w messages will be discarded if the queue is full e If the initial message sent to a mail recipient is not delivered it will be placed in the waiting queue until its place in the queue has been reached and then another attempt to transmit the message is made e There is a maximum of three attempts to deliver mail to recipients Mail message delivery attempts will be tried every five minutes until the maximum number of attempts is reached Once reached and the message has not been successfully delivered the message will be dropped and not received by the mail recipient If the Switch shuts down or reboots mail messages in the waiting queue will be lost SMTP Server Settings The following window is used to configure the fields to set up the SMTP server for the switch along with setting e mail addresses to which switch log files can be sent when a problem arises on the Switch To open the following window click Administration gt SMTP Service gt SMTP Server Settings SMTP State Disabled Y SMTP Server Address 10 1 1 SMTP Server Port 1 65535 25 Self Mail Address me eswitch com MENA Address me switch com Figure 6 60 SMTP Service Settings and Mail Receiver Address Table window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description SMTP State Use the pull down menu to enable or
287. wing parameters Disabled Parameter Description 10 Disabled From To Selecta port or group of ports to SENS enable for MAC notification using 12 Disabled the pull down menus 13 Disabled Enable MAC Notification for the 14 Disabled ports selected using the pull 15 Disabled down menu 16 Disabled Click Apply to implement changes made 17 Disabled l8 Disabled 19 Disabled 0 Disabled 2l Disabled e Disabled 2i Disabled e Disabled 25 Disabled 6 Disabled Figure 6 17 MAC Notification Settings DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual TFTP Services Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP services allow the Switch s firmware to be upgraded by transferring a new firmware file from a TFTP server to the Switch or vice versa Use the pull down menu to select the service to be completed Download Firmware is used to transfer a firmware file from an outside source to the Switch using the TFTP Protocol Download Configuration is used to transfer a configuration file from an outside source to the Switch using the TFTP Protocol Upload Configuration is used to transfer a configuration file from the Switch to an outside source using the TFTP Protocol Upload Log is used to transfer the Switch s log file from the Switch to an outside source using the TFTP Protocol Once the user has selected an operation to perform enter the Server IP Address and the path of the filename in use and click Start
288. wing two fields Auth Protocol MD5 Specifies that the HMAC MD5 96 authentication level will be used This field is only operable when V3 is selected in the SNMP Version field and the Encryption field has been checked This field will require the user to enter a password SHA Specifies that the HMAC SHA authentication protocol will be used This field is only operable when V3 is selected in the SNMP Version field and the Encryption field has been checked This field will require the user to enter a password Priv Protocol None Specifies that no authorization protocol is in use DES Specifies that DES 56 bit encryption is in use based on the CBC DES DES 56 standard This field is only operable when V3 is selected in the SNMP Version field and the Encryption field has been checked This field will require the user to enter a password between 8 and 16 alphanumeric characters 48 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual To implement changes made click Apply To return to the SNMP User Table click the Show All SNMP User Table Entries link SNMP View Table The SNMP View Table is used to assign views to community strings that define which MIB objects can be accessed by a remote SNMP manager To view this table click Administration gt SNMP Manager gt SNMP View Table Ade Total Entries 3 Note It is allowed msert 30 entries into the table only SNMP View Table View Name subt
289. witch Enter the commands to complete your desired tasks Many commands require administrator level access privileges Read the next section for more information on setting up user accounts See the DES 3026 Command Line Interface Reference Manual on the documentation CD for a list of all commands and additional information on using the CLI When you have completed your tasks exit the session with the logout command or close the emu lator program Make sure the terminal or PC you are using to make this connection is configured to match these settings If you are having problems making this connection on a PC make sure the emulation is set to VT 100 You will be able to set the emulation by clicking on the File menu in you HyperTerminal window clicking on Properties in the drop down menu and then clicking the Settings tab This is where you will find the Emulation options If you still do not see anything try rebooting the Switch by disconnecting its power supply Once connected to the console the screen below will appear on your console screen This is where the user will enter commands to perform all the available management functions The Switch will prompt the user to enter a user name and a password Upon the initial connection there is no user name or password and therefore just press enter twice to access the command line interface DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Command Line Interface Firmware Build 4 20 B27 Copyright C 2007 D L
290. ws the entry of a VLAN ID in the Add dialog box or displays the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN in the Modify dialog box VLANs can be identified by either the VID or the VLAN name VLAN Name Allows the entry of a name for the new VLAN in the Add dialog box or for editing the VLAN name in the Modify dialog box Port Settings Allows an individual port to be specified as member of a VLAN Allows an individual port to be specified as a non VLAN member Select this to specify the port as a static member of the VLAN Egress member ports are ports that will be transmitting traffic for the VLAN These ports can be either tagged or untagged Click Apply to implement changes made Click the Show All Static VLAN Entries link to return to the 802 1Q Static VLANs window Tag Specifies the port as either 802 1Q tagging or 802 1Q untagged Checking the box will desig nate the port as Tagged 90 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual Link Aggregation Understanding Port Trunk Groups Port trunk groups are used to combine a number of ports together to make a single high bandwidth data pipeline The Switch supports up to three port trunk groups with 2 to 8 ports in each group A potential bit rate of 8000 Mbps can be achieved An Example of Link Aggregation Ethernet Backbone Uplink ee Yom Port Trunk Group me oom o DES 3018 TO di D Link 100 Mbps 100 Mbps 100 Mbps
291. ww dlink co il support e mail support Mdlink co il Pakistan Tel 92 21 4548158 or 92 21 4548310 Sunday to Thursday 9 00am to 6 00pm http support dlink me com e mail support pk Wdlink me com South Africa and Sub Sahara Region Tel 27 12 665 2165 08600 DLINK for South Africa only Monday to Friday 8 30am to 9 00pm South Africa Time http www d link co za Turkey Tel 90 212 2895659 Monday to Friday 9 00am to 6 00pm http www dlink com tr e mail turkiye dlink me com e mail support d link co za U A E and North Africa Tel 971 4 391 6480 U A E Sunday to Wednesday 9 00am to 6 00pm GMT 4 Thursday 9 00am to 1 00pm GMT 4 http support dlink me com e mail support dlink me com D Link Building Networks for People TexHuueckaa noAnepxka O6OHOBNeHUA mporpammMHOro obecnevenna n HOKYMEHTALUMA HOCTynMHbI Ha WHTepHet cante D Link D Link npeaoctaBnaert OecnnaTHylo noAnepxkKy ANA KNUeHTOB B TeyeHne FapaHTuvHoro cpokKa KJIMeHTbI MOryT ODPaTuUTECA B rpynny TexHnyecko Noe pxKu D Link no TeneqoHy nnn yepe3 NHTepHer TexHunueckaa noaaepxka D Link 495 744 00 99 TexHunueckaa noaaepxka yepe3 MHTepHerT http www dlink ru e mail support dlink ru D Link Building Networks for People Asistencia T cnica D Link Latin Am rica pone a disposici n de sus clientes especificaciones documentaci n y software mas reciente a trav s de nuestro Sitio Web www dlinkla com El servicio de soporte t
292. y also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Packet Errors gt Received RX Port 15 Apply View Table Rx Error Analysis Port Port 15 1000 CrcError 800 a00 Undersize o POD CwerSize 600 Fragment Do 500 400 00 Drop 200 100 Unitipacketisec Time Interval lis Record Number 200 ShowHide M CrcError M UnderSize M OverSize M Fragment i Jabber W Drop Figure 11 9 Rx Error Analysis window line graph To view the Received Error Packets Table click the link View Table which will show the following table 174 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual View Line hart Packet Analysis of Port Port 1 lis l EA Undersize Oversize Fragment Jabber Drop Figure 11 10 Rx Error Analysis window table The following fields can be set Parameter Description Time Interval 1s Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number 200 Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Counts otherwise valid packets that did not end on a byte octet boundary The number of packets detected that are less than the minimum permitted packets size of 64 bytes and have a good CRC Undersize packets usually indicate collis
293. ystem system daemons 39 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual 4 security authorization messages 5 messages generated internally by syslog line printer subsystem T network news subsystem 8 UUCP subsystem 9 clock daemon 10 security authorization messages 11 FTP daemon 12 NTP subsystem 13 log audit 14 log alert 15 clock daemon 16 local use 0 local0 17 local use 1 local1 18 local use 2 local2 19 local use 3 local3 20 local use 4 local4 21 local use 5 local5 22 local use 6 local6 23 local use 7 local7 UDP Port 514 or Enter the UDP port number used for sending Syslog messages The default is 514 5000 65535 Status Choose Enabled or Disabled to activate or deactivate To set the System Log Server configuration click Apply To delete an entry from the Current System Log Server window click the corresponding under the Delete heading of the entry to delete To return to the Current System Log Servers window click the Show All System Log Servers link 40 DES 3010F DES 3010FL DES 3010G DES 3016 DES 3018 DES 3026 Fast Ethernet Switch Manual SNTP Settings Time Settings This window is used to configure the time settings for the Switch To view this window click Administration gt SNTP Settings gt Time Settings SIN TP State SN TF Primary Server SNTE Secondary Server ANTE Poll Interval m Seconds Tim
294. zna pomoc techniczna firmy D Link 0 801 022 021 Pomoc techniczna firmy D Link Swiadczona przez Internet Web http www dlink pl E mail dlink fixit pl D Link Building Networks for People Technick podpora Aktualizovane verze software a uzivatelskych pr rucek najdete na webov str nce firmy D Link D Link poskytuje svym zakaznikum bezplatnou technickou podporu Zakaznici mohou kontaktovat oddeleni technick podpory pres webov str nky mailem nebo telefonicky Telefon 225 281 553 Land Line 1 78 CZK min Mobile 9 40 CZK min Telefonick podpora je v provozu PO PA od 09 00 do 17 00 Web http www dlink cz suppport E mail support dlink cz D Link Building Networks for People Technikai T mogat s Meghajto programokat s frissiteseket a D Link Magyarorsz g weblapj r l tolthet le Tel 06 1 461 3001 Fax 06 1 461 3004 Land Line 14 99 HUG min Mobile 49 99 HUF min Web http www dlink hu E mail support dlink hu D Link Building Networks for People Teknisk Support Du kan finne programvare oppdateringer og bruker dokumentasjon p D Links web sider D Link tilbyr sine kunder gratis teknisk support under produktets garantitid Kunder kan kontakte D Links teknisk support via v re hjemmesider eller p tlf D Link Teknisk telefon Support 800 10 610 Hverdager 08 00 20 00 D Link Teknisk Support over Internett Web http www dlink no D Link Building Networks for P

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Severin KS 9789 refrigerator  Premiere Pro CS3  • Manual de instrucciones. • Manual de instruções • Mode d`emploi  Rapport de projet « bataille navale » Base de la programmation  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file